Cover

Before Use

Common Camera Operations Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

1 Camera Basics Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Camera User Guide Modes 4 P Mode Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode 6 Playback Mode • Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety • Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages. Wi-Fi Functions ENGLISH Precautions” section (= 8), before using the camera. : Next page 7 • Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera : Previous page 8 Setting Menu properly. : Page before you clicked a link Accessories • Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the • To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter 9 future. title at right. From chapter title pages, you can access topics by 10 Appendix clicking their titles. Index

©CANON INC. 2013 CDD-E553-010 1 Cover Package Contents Preliminary Notes and Legal Before Use Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package. Information Common Camera If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer. • Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images were Operations recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries and Basic Guide affiliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory, including memory Advanced Guide cards, that result in the failure of an image to be recorded or to be Camera Battery Pack Battery Charger recorded in a way that is machine readable. Camera Basics NB-6LH CB-2LY/CB‑2LYE 1 • Images recorded by the camera are intended for personal use. Refrain Auto Mode / from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note that 2 Hybrid Auto Mode even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright or other Other Shooting legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some commercial 3 Modes settings. 4 P Mode Wrist Strap Getting Started Warranty Card The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of • Tv, Av, M, and • A memory card is not included (= 2). camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before 5 C Mode contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. 6 Playback Mode Compatible Memory Cards • Although the LCD monitor is produced under extremely high-precision manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the meet Wi-Fi Functions The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of design specifications, in rare cases some pixels may be defective or may 7 capacity. appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate camera damage or 8 Setting Menu • SD memory cards*1 affect recorded images. • SDHC memory cards*1*2 • The LCD monitor may be covered with a thin plastic film for protection 9 Accessories 1 2 against scratches during shipment. If covered, remove the film before • SDXC memory cards* * Appendix *1 Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been using the camera. 10 verified to work with the camera. • When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become warm. Index *2 UHS-I memory cards are also supported. This does not indicate damage.

2 Cover Part Names and Conventions in This • Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in brackets. Before Use Guide • : Important information you should know • : Notes and tips for expert camera use Common Camera Operations • : Indicates touch-screen operations • =xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents a Basic Guide page number) • Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings. Advanced Guide • For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as Camera Basics the “memory card”. 1 • The tabs shown above titles indicate whether the function is used for still Auto Mode / images, movies, or both. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Still Images : Indicates that the function is used when shooting or Other Shooting 3 Modes viewing still images. Movies : Indicates that the function is used when shooting or 4 P Mode viewing movies. Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode Zoom lever Power button Shooting: < i (telephoto)> / Speaker 6 Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Playback: < k (magnify)> / Control ring 7 Strap mount 8 Setting Menu Lamp switch Microphone Wi-Fi antenna area 9 Accessories Lens Tripod socket Appendix Mode dial Memory card/battery cover 10 button DC coupler terminal cover Index

3 Cover zz Turning the control dial is one way to Before Use choose setting items, switch images, and perform other operations. Most of these Common Camera operations are also possible with the Operations

buttons. Basic Guide

• In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera Advanced Guide buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble. • The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons. 1 Camera Basics <7> Control dial on back Auto Mode / Control ring on front 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Up button on back Other Shooting Left button on back 3 Modes Screen (LCD monitor)* <1 (Playback)> button Right button on back 4 P Mode DIGITAL terminal Movie button

Down button on back HDMITM terminal / Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode < (Ring function selector)> / < (Wi-Fi)> / Up button button / Right button 6 Playback Mode Control dial FUNC./SET button Wi-Fi Functions / / Down button 7 focus)> / Left button button Setting Menu Indicator 8 * Gestures may not be detected as easily if you apply a screen protector. In this case, Accessories increase the sensitivity of the touch-screen panel (= 163). 9 10 Appendix

Index

4 Cover Table of Contents 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode...... 93 Installing CameraWindow on a Smartphone...... 136 Before Use Specific Shutter Speeds Preparing to Register a ([Tv] Mode)...... 94 Common Camera Computer...... 137 Package Contents...... 2 2 Auto Mode / Specific Aperture Values Operations Accessing the Wi-Fi Menu...... 139 Compatible Memory Cards...... 2 Hybrid Auto Mode...... 29 ([Av] Mode)...... 94 Connecting via an Access Basic Guide Preliminary Notes and Legal Specific Shutter Speeds and Shooting with Camera-Determined Point...... 140 Information...... 2 Aperture Values ([M] Mode)...... 95 Advanced Guide Settings...... 30 Connecting without an Part Names and Conventions Customization for Shooting Common, Convenient Features....36 Access Point...... 145 in This Guide...... 3 Styles...... 96 Camera Basics Using Face ID...... 41 Connecting to Another 1 Table of Contents...... 5 Customizing the FUNC. Menu Image Customization Features.....46 Camera...... 147 Auto Mode / Common Camera Operations...... 7 (FUNC. Menu Layout)...... 100 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Helpful Shooting Features...... 49 Sending Images...... 148 Safety Precautions...... 8 Other Shooting Customizing Camera Operation...51 6 Playback Mode...... 103 Saving Images to a Computer....150 3 Modes Sending Images Automatically Basic Guide...... 11 3 Other Shooting Modes...... 53 Viewing...... 104 (Image Sync)...... 151 4 P Mode Browsing and Filtering Images...108 Geotagging Images on the Initial Preparations...... 12 Specific Scenes...... 54 Tv, Av, M, and Editing Face ID Information...... 112 Camera...... 153 5 C Mode Trying the Camera Out...... 17 Image Effects (Creative Filters)....56 Image Viewing Options...... 113 Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Playback Mode Special Modes for Other Protecting Images...... 116 Settings...... 153 6 Advanced Guide...... 21 Purposes...... 61 Erasing Images...... 118 Wi-Fi Functions Shooting Various Movies...... 67 7 Rotating Images...... 120 8 Setting Menu...... 156 Camera Basics...... 21 Setting Menu 1 4 P Mode...... 69 Tagging Images as Favorites...... 121 Adjusting Basic Camera 8 Functions...... 157 On/Off...... 22 Convenient Control: Shooting in Program AE Touch Actions...... 122 9 Accessories Shutter Button...... 23 ([P] Mode)...... 70 Editing Still Images...... 124 9 Accessories...... 166 Shooting Modes...... 23 Image Brightness (Exposure)...... 70 10 Appendix Editing Movies...... 128 System Map...... 167 Shooting Display Options...... 24 Color and Continuous Shooting....76 Optional Accessories...... 168 Index Using the FUNC. Menu...... 24 Shooting Range and Focusing.....80 7 Wi-Fi Functions...... 130 Using Optional Accessories...... 169 Using Menus...... 25 Flash...... 87 What You Can Do with Wi-Fi...... 131 Using the Software...... 173 On-Screen Keyboard...... 27 Shooting RAW Images...... 90 Indicator Display...... 28 Preparing to Share Images via Printing Images...... 176 Other Settings...... 91 Wi-Fi...... 132 Clock...... 28 Registering Web Services...... 133 5 Cover 10 Appendix...... 184 Before Use Troubleshooting...... 185 On-Screen Messages...... 188 Common Camera Operations On-Screen Information...... 191 Functions and Menu Tables...... 193 Basic Guide Handling Precautions...... 204 Advanced Guide Specifications...... 204 Index...... 208 1 Camera Basics Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions...... 211 Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting 3 Modes 4 P Mode Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

6 Cover Common Camera Operations Applying special effects Before Use

4 Shoot Common Camera zz Use camera-determined settings Operations (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)...... 30, 32 Vivid Colors Poster Effect “Aged” Photos Basic Guide (= 56) (= 56) (= 57) Shooting people well Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics I P Auto Mode / Portraits Against Snow Fish-Eye Effect Miniature Effect Toy Camera Effect 2 Hybrid Auto Mode (= 54) (= 54) (= 58) (= 58) (= 59) Other Shooting 3 Modes 4 P Mode Matching specific scenes Tv, Av, M, and Background Defocus Soft Focus Monochrome 5 C Mode S t (= 60) (= 60) (= 61) 6 Playback Mode Night Scenes Under Water Fireworks Starry Skies Wi-Fi Functions (= 54) (= 54) (= 55) (= 64) 7 zz Focus on faces...... 30, 54, 83, 85 zz Without using the flash (Flash Off)...... 31, 88 8 Setting Menu zz Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)...... 38, 63 9 Accessories zz Add a date stamp...... 40 Appendix zz Use Face ID...... 41, 108 10 zz Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest)...... 32 Index

7 Cover 1 View Safety Precautions Before Use zz View images (Playback Mode)...... 104 • Before using the product, please ensure that you read the safety zz Automatic playback (Slideshow)...... 114 Common Camera precautions described below. Always ensure that the product is used Operations zz On a TV...... 169 correctly. The safety precautions noted on the following pages are intended Basic Guide zz On a computer...... 173 • to prevent injuries to yourself and other persons, or damage to the zz Browse through images quickly...... 108 equipment. Advanced Guide zz Erase images...... 118 • Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold Camera Basics accessories you use. 1 E Shoot/View Movies Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz Shoot movies...... 30, 67 Warning Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death. Other Shooting zz View movies (Playback Mode)...... 104 3 Modes • Do not trigger the flash in close proximity to people’s eyes. zz Fast-moving subjects, slow-motion playback...... 67 Exposure to the intense light produced by the flash could damage eyesight. 4 P Mode In particular, remain at least 1 meter (39 inches) away from infants when Tv, Av, M, and c Print using the flash. 5 C Mode zz Print pictures...... 176 • Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants. Playback Mode Strap: Putting the strap around a child’s neck could result in asphyxiation. 6 Save Date/time battery (if removable): Dangerous if swallowed. If this occurs, 7 Wi-Fi Functions zz Save images to a computer via a cable...... 174 contact a doctor immediately. Setting Menu • Use only recommended power sources. 8 Use Wi-Fi Functions • Do not attempt to disassemble, alter or apply heat to the product. Accessories zz Send images to a smartphone...... 132 • Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts. 9 zz Share images online...... 133 • To avoid the risk of injury, do not touch the interior of the product if Appendix it has been dropped or otherwise damaged. 10 zz Send images to a computer...... 151 • Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke, a strange Index smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally. • Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to clean the product. • Do not let the product come into contact with water (e.g. sea water) or other liquids.

8 Cover • Do not allow liquids or foreign objects to enter the camera. This could result in electrical shock or fire. Caution Denotes the possibility of injury. Before Use If liquids or foreign objects come into contact with the camera interior, • When holding the camera by the strap, be careful not to bang it, Common Camera immediately turn the camera off and remove the battery pack/batteries. Operations If the battery charger (for cameras that use one) becomes wet, unplug subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other it from the outlet and consult your camera retailer or a Canon Customer objects. Basic Guide Support Help Desk. • Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens. This could lead to injury or damage the camera. Advanced Guide • Do not look through the viewfinder (if your model has one) at bright light sources, such as the sun on a clear day. • Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts. 1 Camera Basics This could damage your eyesight. If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments. Auto Mode / • Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries. • When using the flash, be careful not to cover it with your fingers or 2 Hybrid Auto Mode • Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct flame. clothing. Other Shooting • If your camera uses a battery charger, note the following This could result in burns or damage to the flash. 3 Modes precautions. • Avoid using, placing or storing the product in the following places: 4 P Mode - Unplug the power cord periodically, and using a dry cloth, wipe - Places subject to direct sunlight away any dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior Tv, Av, M, and - Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F) 5 C Mode of the power outlet, and the surrounding area. - Humid or dusty areas - Do not handle the power cord with wet hands. These could cause leakage, overheating or an explosion of the battery 6 Playback Mode - Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, fire, burns or other injuries. Wi-Fi Functions capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if High temperatures may deform the product. 7 the power cord or plug are damaged, or not fully plugged into the outlet. • The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed 8 Setting Menu - Do not allow dirt or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact for prolonged periods. the terminals or plug. 9 Accessories • When using optional lenses, lens filters, or filter adapters (if The battery pack/batteries may explode or leak, resulting in electrical shock applicable), be sure to attach these accessories firmly. or fire. This could cause injury and damage the surroundings. In the event 10 Appendix If the lens becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the shards of glass that a battery pack leaks and the battery electrolyte contacts eyes, mouth, may lead to cuts. Index skin or clothing, immediately flush with water. • On cameras that raise and lower the flash automatically, make sure • Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited. your finger is out of the way when the flash is lowered, to avoid The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the pinching it. operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate This could result in injury. caution when using the camera in places where use of electronic devices is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities. 9 Cover Caution Denotes the possibility of damage to the equipment. • If your camera uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that have Before Use different levels of charge together, do not use old and new batteries • Do not aim the camera at bright light sources (such as the sun on a together, and do not insert the batteries with the + and – terminals Common Camera clear day). reversed. Operations Doing so may damage the . This may cause the product to malfunction. Basic Guide • When using the camera on a beach or at a windy location, be careful • Do not sit down with the camera in your pocket. Advanced Guide not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera. Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen. • On cameras that raise and lower the flash automatically, do not push the flash down or pry it open. • When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do 1 Camera Basics This may cause the product to malfunction. not come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that Auto Mode / it faces the camera body), if your camera has a screen that closes. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode • In regular use, small amounts of smoke may be emitted from the • Do not attach any hard objects to the camera. Other Shooting flash. Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen. 3 Modes This is due to the high intensity of the flash burning dust and foreign materials stuck to the front of the unit. Please use a cotton swab to remove 4 P Mode dirt, dust or other foreign matter from the flash to prevent heat build-up and Tv, Av, M, and damage to the unit. 5 C Mode • Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using 6 Playback Mode the camera. If the battery pack or batteries are left inside the camera, damage caused 7 Wi-Fi Functions by leakage may occur. Setting Menu • Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals 8 with tape or other insulators. Accessories Contacting other metal materials may lead to fire or explosions. 9 • If your camera is used with a battery charger, keep the charger 10 Appendix unplugged when not in use. When charging the battery pack, do not Index leave it covered with a cloth or put other objects on it. Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to overheat and distort, resulting in fire. • Do not leave the battery pack near pets. Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating or explosion, resulting in fire or damage. 10 Cover Basic Guide Before Use Common Camera Operations Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Basic information and instructions, from initial preparations to shooting and 1 Camera Basics playback Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting 3 Modes 4 P Mode Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode Initial Preparations...... 12 Trying the Camera Out...... 17 Attaching the Strap...... 12 Shooting (Smart Auto)...... 17 6 Playback Mode Holding the Camera...... 12 Viewing...... 19 Charging the Battery Pack...... 12 7 Wi-Fi Functions Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card...... 13 Setting the Date and Time...... 15 Setting Menu Display Language...... 16 8 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

11 Cover Initial Preparations Holding the Camera Before Use Prepare for shooting as follows. zz Place the strap around your wrist. Common Camera zz Operations Attaching the Strap When shooting, keep your arms close to your body and hold the camera securely Basic Guide to prevent it from moving. If you have zz Thread the end of the strap through the raised the flash, do not rest your fingers Advanced Guide strap hole ( ), and then pull the other on it. end of the strap through the loop on the 1 Camera Basics threaded end ( ). Charging the Battery Pack Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to Other Shooting charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the 3 Modes battery pack charged. 4 P Mode zz Tv, Av, M, and The strap can also be attached to the left 1 Insert the battery pack. 5 C Mode side of the camera. zz After aligning the  marks on the battery pack and charger, insert the battery pack 6 Playback Mode by pushing it in ( ) and down ( ). 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 2 Charge the battery pack. Accessories zz CB‑2LY: Flip out the plug ( ) and plug 9 the charger into a power outlet ( ). 10 Appendix zz CB-2LYE: Plug the power cord into the CB-2LY charger, then plug the other end into a Index power outlet. zz The charging lamp turns orange and charging begins. zz When charging is finished, the lamp turns green. CB-2LYE 12 Cover 3 Remove the battery pack. Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card zz Before Use After unplugging the battery charger, Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately). remove the battery pack by pushing it in Common Camera Note that before using a new memory card (or a memory card formatted Operations ( ) and up ( ). in another device), you should format the memory card with this camera (= 160). Basic Guide

Advanced Guide • To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not 1 Check the card’s write-protect charge it continuously for more than 24 hours. tab. Camera Basics For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach the 1 • zz Recording is not possible on memory charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in malfunction Auto Mode / cards with a write-protect tab when the or damage to the product. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode tab is in the locked (downward) position. Other Shooting Slide the tab up until it clicks into the 3 Modes • For details on charging time and the number of shots and recording time unlocked position. possible with a fully charged battery pack, see “Number of Shots/Recording 4 P Mode Time, Playback Time” (= 205). 2 Open the cover. • Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when they are not Tv, Av, M, and zz 5 C Mode used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately before) the day of use. Slide the cover ( ) and open it ( ). • The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz). For 6 Playback Mode power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may 7 Wi-Fi Functions damage the battery pack. 3 Insert the battery pack. Setting Menu zz While pressing the battery lock in the 8 direction of the arrow, insert the battery 9 Accessories pack as shown and push it in until it clicks into the locked position. 10 Appendix zz If you insert the battery pack facing the Index wrong way, it cannot be locked into the correct position. Always confirm that the battery pack is facing the right way and Terminals Battery Lock locks when inserted.

13 Cover 4 Insert the memory card. Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card Before Use zz Insert the memory card facing as shown until it clicks into the locked position. Remove the battery pack. Common Camera Operations zz Make sure the memory card is facing the zz Open the cover and press the battery right way when you insert it. Inserting lock in the direction of the arrow. Basic Guide memory cards facing the wrong way may zz The battery pack will pop up. damage the camera. Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics Auto Mode / Label 2 Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting 5 Remove the memory card. Modes Close the cover. zz Push the memory card in until it clicks, zz P Mode Lower the cover ( ) and hold it down as and then slowly release it. 4 you slide it, until it clicks into the closed zz The memory card will pop up. Tv, Av, M, and position ( ). 5 C Mode 6 Playback Mode • For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be saved on one Wi-Fi Functions memory card, see “Number of 4:3 Shots per Memory Card” (= 205). 7 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

14 Cover Setting the Date and Time 4 Finish the setup process. zz Before Use Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen Press the button when finished. After a confirmation message, the setting Common Camera is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this way Operations is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when you screen is no longer displayed. manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date. zz To turn off the camera, press the power Basic Guide You can also add a date stamp to shots, if you wish (= 40). button. Advanced Guide • Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/Time] 1 Turn the camera on. 1 Camera Basics zz Press the power button. screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on. Specify the correct information. Auto Mode / zz The [Date/Time] screen is displayed. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode • To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2 and then Other Shooting 3 Modes choose [ ] by pressing the

buttons or turning the <7> dial. 2 Set the date and time. 4 P Mode zz Press the buttons to choose an • You can also set the date and time by touching the desired option on the Tv, Av, M, and screen in step 2 and then touching [o][p], followed by [ ]. Similarly, you option. 5 C Mode zz Press the

buttons or turn the can also set your home time zone by touching [q][r] on the screen in step 3, followed by [ ]. Playback Mode <7> dial to specify the date and time. 6 zz When finished, press the button. 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix 3 Set the home time zone. Index zz Press the buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose your home time zone.

15 Cover

Before Use Changing the Date and Time • Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the camera’s built-in Adjust the date and time as follows. date/time battery (backup battery) after the battery pack is removed. Common Camera • The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you insert a Operations charged battery pack or connect the camera to an AC adapter kit (sold 1 Access the camera menu. Basic Guide zz Press the button. separately, = 168), even if the camera is left off. • Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will be Advanced Guide displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date and time as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (= 15). 1 Camera Basics 2 Choose [Date/Time]. Auto Mode / Display Language 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz Move the zoom lever to choose the [3] Other Shooting tab. Change the display language as needed. 3 Modes zz Press the

buttons or turn the P Mode <7> dial to choose [Date/Time], and then 1 Enter Playback mode. 4 press the button. zz Press the <1> button. Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode 6 Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions 2 Access the setting screen. 7 zz Press and hold the button, and 8 Setting Menu 3 Change the date and time. then immediately press the button. Accessories zz Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date and 9 Time” (= 15) to adjust the settings. 10 Appendix zz Press the button to close the menu. Index

16 Cover Still Images Movies 3 Set the display language. Before Use zz Press the

buttons or Trying the Camera Out turn the <7> dial to choose a language, Common Camera Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or Operations and then press the button. movies, and then view them. zz Once the display language has been set, Basic Guide the setting screen is no longer displayed. Shooting (Smart Auto) Advanced Guide For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes, simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions. 1 Camera Basics Auto Mode / 1 Turn the camera on. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz Press the power button. Other Shooting 3 Modes zz The startup screen is displayed. • The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after pressing the 4 P Mode button before you press the button. In this case, press the button to dismiss the time display and repeat step 2. Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode • You can also change the display language by pressing the button 2 Enter [ ] mode. and choosing [Language ] on the [3] tab. zz Set the mode dial to [ ]. 6 Playback Mode zz Aim the camera at the subject. The • You can also set the display language by touching a language on the screen in 7 Wi-Fi Functions step 3 and then touching it again. camera will make a slight clicking noise as it determines the scene. 8 Setting Menu zz Icons representing the scene and image stabilization mode are displayed in the 9 Accessories upper left of the screen. Appendix zz Frames displayed around any detected 10 subjects indicate that they are in focus. Index

17 Cover 3 Compose the shot. Shoot. Before Use zz To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move zz Press the shutter button all the way the zoom lever toward (telephoto), down. Common Camera Operations and to zoom away from the subject, move zz As the camera shoots, a shutter sound it toward (wide angle). is played, and in low-light conditions Basic Guide 4 when you have raised the flash, it fires Shoot. automatically. Advanced Guide Shooting Still Images zz Keep the camera still until the shutter Camera Basics Focus. sound ends. 1 zz Press the shutter button lightly, halfway zz After displaying your shot, the camera will Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode down. The camera beeps twice after revert to the shooting screen. focusing, and AF frames are displayed to Other Shooting zz Even while the shot is displayed, you can 3 indicate image areas in focus. Modes take another shot by pressing the shutter P Mode button again. 4 Tv, Av, M, and Shooting Movies 5 C Mode

Start shooting. Playback Mode zz Press the movie button. The camera 6 beeps once as recording begins, and 7 Wi-Fi Functions [ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed time. zz If [Raise the flash] appears on the screen, Elapsed Time zz Black bars are displayed on the top and Setting Menu move the switch to raise the flash. It 8 bottom edges of the screen, and the will fire when shooting. If you prefer not subject is slightly enlarged. The black 9 Accessories to use the flash, push it down with your bars indicate image areas not recorded. finger, into the camera. Appendix zz Frames displayed around any detected 10 faces indicate that they are in focus. Index zz Once recording begins, take your finger off the movie button.

18 Cover Finish shooting. zz To access Scroll Display mode, turn the Before Use zz Press the movie button again to stop <7> dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the shooting. The camera beeps twice as <7> dial to browse through images. Common Camera Operations recording stops. zz To return to single-image display, press the button. Basic Guide

• You can make a short movie of the day (digest movie) just by shooting still Advanced Guide images. When the mode dial is set to [ ], the camera automatically records a movie clip of the scene immediately before each shot (Hybrid Auto Mode zz Movies are identified by a [ ] icon. To 1 Camera Basics (= 32)). play movies, go to step 3. Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Viewing Other Shooting 3 Modes After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as P Mode follows. 4 Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode 1 Enter Playback mode. 3 Play movies. zz Press the < > button to access the zz Press the <1> button. m 6 Playback Mode movie control panel, choose [ ] (either zz Your last shot is displayed. press the buttons or turn the 7 Wi-Fi Functions <7> dial), and then press the button again. 8 Setting Menu 2 Browse through your images. zz Playback now begins, and after the movie zz Volume Accessories To view the previous image, press is finished, [ ] is displayed. 9 the button or turn the <7> dial zz To adjust the volume, press the

Appendix counterclockwise. To view the next 10 buttons. image, press the button or turn the Index <7> dial clockwise. • To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button zz Press and hold the buttons to halfway. browse through images quickly.

19 Cover Touch-Screen Operations Erasing the Images Before Use zz To view the next image, drag left across You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when Common Camera the screen in step 2, and to view the erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. Operations previous image, drag right. Basic Guide zz To access Scroll Display mode, quickly 1 Choose an image to erase. drag left or right repeatedly. zz Press the buttons or turn the Advanced Guide zz To return to single-image display from <7> dial to choose an image. Scroll Display mode, touch the image in 1 Camera Basics the middle of the screen. 2 Erase the image. zz Auto Mode / zz Choose a movie, and touch [ ] to start Press the button. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz playback. After [Erase?] is displayed, press the Other Shooting zz To adjust the volume during movie buttons or turn the <7> dial to 3 Modes choose [Erase], and then press the playback, quickly drag up or down across 4 P Mode the screen. button. zz The current image is now erased. Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode zz To cancel erasure, press the buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose 6 Playback Mode [Cancel], and then press the button. 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu • You can also erase all images at once (= 119). 9 Accessories

Appendix • You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the screen in 10 step 2. Index • Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions (= 122).

20 Cover Advanced Guide Before Use Common Camera Operations Basic Guide 1 Camera Basics Advanced Guide Camera Basics Practical guide that introduces other camera basics and describes shooting and playback 1 Auto Mode / options 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting 3 Modes 4 P Mode Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode On/Off...... 22 Shooting Display Options...... 24 On-Screen Keyboard...... 27 Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)...... 22 Using the FUNC. Menu...... 24 Indicator Display...... 28 6 Playback Mode Shutter Button...... 23 Using Menus...... 25 Clock...... 28 Shooting Modes...... 23 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

21 Cover On/Off Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) Before Use As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates Shooting Mode Common Camera the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specific period of Operations zz Press the power button to turn the inactivity. camera on and prepare for shooting. Basic Guide zz To turn the camera off, press the power Power Saving in Shooting Mode Advanced Guide button again. The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of inactivity. Playback Mode In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera turns itself Camera Basics off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off 1 zz Press the <1> button to turn the camera but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway (= 23). Auto Mode / on and view your shots. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz To turn the camera off, press the <1> 3 Other Shooting button again. Power Saving in Playback Mode Modes The camera turns itself off automatically after about five minutes of inactivity. 4 P Mode • To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the <1> button. Tv, Av, M, and • To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button • You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of Display Off, if 5 C Mode halfway (= 23). you prefer (= 159). • The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera is in Playback Mode • Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other devices via 6 Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is retracted by Wi-Fi (= 130), or when connected to a computer (= 174). pressing the <1> button. 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

22 Cover Shutter Button Shooting Modes Before Use To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode. Common Camera button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all P, Tv, Av, M, and C Modes Operations the way down to shoot. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Take a variety of shots using Basic Guide In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the Fully automatic shooting, with your preferred settings button halfway or all the way down. camera-determined settings (= 69, 93). (= 17, 30, 32). Advanced Guide 1 Press halfway. (Press lightly to 1 Camera Basics focus.) Auto Mode / zz Press the shutter button halfway. The Scene Mode 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Movie Mode camera beeps twice, and AF frames are Shoot with optimal settings for Other Shooting specific scenes (= 54). For shooting movies displayed around image areas in focus. (= 67). 3 Modes You can also shoot movies when the mode dial is not P Mode set to Movie mode, simply 4 2 Press all the way down. (From by pressing the movie Tv, Av, M, and button. the halfway position, press fully Creative Filters Mode 5 C Mode to shoot.) Add a variety of effects to images when shooting (= 56). 6 Playback Mode zz The camera shoots, as a shutter sound is played. 7 Wi-Fi Functions zz Keep the camera still until the shutter sound ends. 8 Setting Menu

Accessories • Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing the 9 shutter button halfway. 10 Appendix • Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes, Index and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject moves) before the shutter sound ends.

23 Cover Shooting Display Options Using the FUNC. Menu Before Use Press the

button to view other information on the screen, or to hide Configure commonly used shooting functions through the FUNC. menu as Common Camera the information. For details on the information displayed, see “On-Screen follows. Operations Information” (= 191). Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode (= 195 – 197). Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Access the FUNC. menu. zz Press the button. 1 Camera Basics Auto Mode / Display 1 Display 2 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting 2 Choose a menu item. 3 Modes • Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night display function zz Press the

buttons to choose a 4 P Mode when you are shooting under low light, making it easier to check how shots menu item. Tv, Av, M, and are composed. However, on-screen image brightness may not match the zz brightness of your shots. Note that any on-screen image distortion or jerky Available options are shown at the bottom 5 C Mode of the screen. subject motion will not affect recorded images. Playback Mode • For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes” (= 106). 6 Options 7 Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu Menu Items 8 9 Accessories 3 Choose an option. zz Press the buttons or turn the 10 Appendix <7> dial to choose an option. zz Options labeled with a [ ] icon can Index be configured by pressing the button. zz Options labeled with a [ ] icon can be configured by pressing the < > button.

24 Cover 4 Finish the setup process. Using Menus Before Use zz Press the < > button. m Configure a variety of camera functions through other menus as follows. zz The screen before you pressed the Common Camera Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting [4], Operations button in step 1 is displayed again, playback [1], and so on. Note that available menu items vary depending showing the option you configured. on the selected shooting or playback mode (= 198 – 203). Basic Guide Advanced Guide • To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default 1 Access the menu. settings (= 165). zz Press the button. 1 Camera Basics Auto Mode / Using Touch-Screen Operations to Configure Settings 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz Access the FUNC. menu by pressing the 3 Other Shooting button, and then either drag the 2 Choose a tab. Modes menu up or down to scroll it, or touch a zz Move the zoom lever to choose a tab. 4 P Mode menu item to choose it. zz After you have pressed the

Tv, Av, M, and zz Touch an option to choose it. Touch the buttons or turned the <7> dial to choose 5 C Mode option again to confirm your choice and a tab initially, you can switch between Playback Mode return to the screen displayed before you tabs by pressing the buttons. 6 Options pressed the button. 7 Wi-Fi Functions zz You can access the screen for options Menu Items labeled with a [ ] icon by touching 8 Setting Menu [ ]. zz You can access the screen for options 9 Accessories labeled with a [ ] icon by touching Appendix [ ]. 10 Index

25 Cover 3 Choose a menu item. Touch-Screen Operations Before Use zz Press the

buttons or turn the • To access tabs, press the button to access the menu, and then <7> dial to choose a menu item. touch the desired tab. Common Camera Operations zz For menu items with options not shown, • Drag the menu items up or down to scroll them, or touch a menu item to first press the or button to choose it. Basic Guide switch screens, and then either press the • Touch an option to choose it. Options shown with [q][r] icons on either Advanced Guide

buttons or turn the <7> dial to side can also be configured by touching these icons. select the menu item. • For menu items displayed with a bar to indicate the level, touch the Camera Basics zz To return to the previous screen, press 1 desired position on the bar. the button. Auto Mode / • To configure menu items for which options are not shown, first touch the 2 Hybrid Auto Mode menu item to access the setting screen. On the setting screen, either Other Shooting drag or touch to choose the menu item, and then touch to choose the 3 Modes 4 Choose an option. option. To return to the previous screen, touch [ ]. 4 P Mode zz Press the buttons to choose an • You can also touch input elements (such as check boxes or text fields) to Tv, Av, M, and option. select them, and you can enter text by touching the on-screen keyboard. 5 C Mode 5 Finish the setup process. • When [ ] is shown, you can touch [ ] instead of pressing the 6 Playback Mode zz Press the button to return to the button, if you prefer. screen displayed before you pressed the • When [ ] is shown, you can touch [ ] instead of pressing the 7 Wi-Fi Functions button in step 1. button, if you prefer. Setting Menu • To dismiss the menu, press the button again. 8 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

• To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default Index settings (= 165).

26 Cover On-Screen Keyboard Confirming Input and Returning to the Previous Screen Before Use Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Face ID (= 42), zz Press the button. Common Camera Wi-Fi connections (= 139), and so on. Note that the length and type of Operations information you can enter varies depending on the function you are using. • Another way to use the keyboard is by pressing the

buttons Basic Guide or turning the <7> dial to select characters or icons, and then pressing the Number of Available Characters Entering Characters button. You can also move the cursor by turning the ring. Advanced Guide zz Touch the characters to enter them. zz The amount of information you can enter 1 Camera Basics varies depending on the function you are Auto Mode / using. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Moving the Cursor Other Shooting 3 Modes zz Touch [ ][ ] or turn the ring. P Mode Entering Line Breaks 4 zz Touch [ ]. Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode

Switching Input Modes Playback Mode zz To switch to numbers or symbols, touch 6 [ ]. 7 Wi-Fi Functions zz To switch between uppercase and lowercase letters, touch [ ]. 8 Setting Menu zz Available input modes vary depending on Accessories the function you are using. 9 Deleting Characters 10 Appendix zz To delete the previous character, either Index touch [ ] or press the button. zz Holding down the button will delete five characters at a time.

27 Cover Indicator Display Clock Before Use The indicator on the back of the camera (= 4) lights up or blinks You can check the current time. Common Camera depending on the camera status. Operations Indicator zz Color Camera Status Press and hold the button. Basic Guide Status zz The current time appears. Connected to a computer (= 174), or display off On zz If you hold the camera vertically while Advanced Guide (= 22, 159) using the clock function, it will switch Green Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting images, to vertical display. Press the 1 Camera Basics Blinking shooting long exposures (= 94, 95), or connecting/ transmitting via Wi-Fi buttons or turn the <7> dial to change Auto Mode / the display color. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz Press the button again to cancel Other Shooting 3 Modes • When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open the the clock display. memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which may P Mode corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card. 4 Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode • When the camera is off, press and hold the button, then press the power 6 Playback Mode button to display the clock. 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

28 Cover

Before Use

Common Camera Operations 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Basic Guide Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control over shooting Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting 3 Modes 4 P Mode Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode Shooting with Camera-Determined Using Face ID...... 41 Helpful Shooting Features...... 49 Settings...... 30 Registering Face ID Information...... 41 Using the Electronic Level...... 49 6 Playback Mode Shooting (Smart Auto)...... 30 Shooting...... 43 Magnifying the Area in Focus...... 49 Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode...... 32 Checking and Editing Registered Information...... 44 Checking for Closed Eyes...... 50 7 Wi-Fi Functions Scene Icons...... 34 Image Customization Features...... 46 Customizing Camera Operation...... 51 Image Stabilization Icons...... 35 Changing the Aspect Ratio...... 46 Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam...... 51 8 Setting Menu On-Screen Frames...... 36 Changing Image Resolution (Size)...... 47 Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp...... 51 Common, Convenient Features...... 36 Red-Eye Correction...... 47 Changing the Image Display Style after Shots...... 52 9 Accessories Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)...... 36 Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths Lamps...... 48 Appendix (Step Zoom)...... 37 Changing Movie Image Quality...... 48 10 Using the Self-Timer...... 38 Index Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch Shutter)...... 39 Adding a Date Stamp...... 40

29 Cover Shooting with Camera-Determined 3 Compose the shot. Before Use Settings zz To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move the zoom lever toward (telephoto), Common Camera Operations For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes, and to zoom away from the subject, move simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions. it toward (wide angle). (A zoom bar Basic Guide Zoom Bar showing the zoom position is displayed.) Still Images Movies Advanced Guide Shooting (Smart Auto) 1 Camera Basics 1 Turn the camera on. Auto Mode / Focus Range (approx.) 2 zz Press the power button. Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting zz The startup screen is displayed. 3 4 Shoot. Modes Shooting Still Images 4 P Mode 2 Enter [ ] mode. Focus. 5 Tv, Av, M, and zz Set the mode dial to [ ]. zz Press the shutter button halfway. The C Mode camera beeps twice after focusing, and zz Aim the camera at the subject. The Playback Mode AF frames are displayed to indicate 6 camera will make a slight clicking noise image areas in focus. as it determines the scene. 7 Wi-Fi Functions zz Several AF frames are displayed when zz Icons representing the scene and image multiple areas are in focus. Setting Menu stabilization mode are displayed in the 8 upper left of the screen (= 34, 35). 9 Accessories zz Frames displayed around any detected subjects indicate that they are in focus. 10 Appendix

Index

30 Cover zz If [Raise the flash] appears on the screen, Shooting Movies Before Use move the switch to raise the flash. It Start shooting. will fire when shooting. If you prefer not zz Press the movie button. The camera Common Camera Operations to use the flash, push it down with your beeps once as recording begins, and finger, into the camera. [ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed Basic Guide Elapsed Time Shoot. time. zz Advanced Guide zz Press the shutter button all the way Black bars are displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen, and the down. Camera Basics subject is slightly enlarged. The black 1 zz As the camera shoots, a shutter sound bars indicate image areas not recorded. Auto Mode / is played, and in low-light conditions 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz Frames displayed around any detected when you have raised the flash, it fires Other Shooting automatically. faces indicate that they are in focus. 3 Modes zz Once recording begins, take your finger zz Keep the camera still until the shutter 4 P Mode sound ends. off the movie button. Tv, Av, M, and zz After displaying your shot, the camera will Resize the subject and 5 C Mode revert to the shooting screen. recompose the shot as needed. Playback Mode zz To resize the subject, repeat the 6 operations in step 3 (= 30). 7 Wi-Fi Functions However, note that the sound of camera operations will be recorded, and movies 8 Setting Menu shot at zoom factors shown in blue will look grainy. 9 Accessories zz When you recompose shots, the Appendix focus, brightness, and colors will be 10 automatically adjusted. Index

31 Cover Finish shooting. 3 Shoot. zz Before Use zz Press the movie button again to stop Follow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)” shooting. The camera beeps twice as (= 30) to shoot a still image. Common Camera Operations recording stops. zz The camera records both a still image zz Recording will stop automatically when and movie clip. The clip, which ends with Basic Guide the memory card becomes full. the still image and a shutter sound, forms a single chapter in the digest movie. Advanced Guide • The flash firing during shots indicates that the camera has automatically Camera Basics attempted to ensure optimal colors in the main subject and background (Multi- • Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [ ] mode, because 1 area White Balance). digest movies are recorded for each shot. Auto Mode / • A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image 2 Hybrid Auto Mode immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [ ] mode, or Other Shooting Still Images Movies operating the camera in other ways. 3 Modes Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode Sounds and vibration caused by camera operation will be recorded • P Mode in digest movies. 4 You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The Tv, Av, M, and camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are 5 • Digest movie quality is [ ] and cannot be changed. C Mode later combined in a digest movie. • Some camera sounds will be muted. Sounds are not played when you press Playback Mode the shutter button halfway or trigger the self-timer (= 157). 6 1 Enter [ ] mode. • Digest movies are saved as separate movie files in the following cases even if 7 Wi-Fi Functions zz Follow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)” they were recorded on the same day in [ ] mode. (= 30) and choose [ ]. - The digest movie file size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the total recording 8 Setting Menu time reaches approximately 13 minutes and 20 seconds. - The digest movie is protected (= 116). 9 Accessories - Daylight saving time (= 15) or time zone (= 158) settings are changed. 2 Compose the shot. - A new folder is created (= 162). 10 Appendix zz Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart • Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modified or erased. Auto)” (= 30) to compose the shot and • If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust the setting in Index focus. advance. Press the button, and on the [4] tab, set [Digest Type] to zz For more impressive digest movies, [No Stills] (= 25). Individual chapters can be edited ( 129). aim the camera at subjects about four • = seconds before shooting still images.

32 Cover

Digest Movie Playback • You can change how long images are displayed after shots (= 52). Before Use Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play a digest movie, or specify the Common Camera date of the digest movie to play (= 107). Operations Movies Basic Guide Still Images/Movies Microphone • Keep your fingers away from the Advanced Guide • If the camera is turned on while the

button is held down, the microphone while shooting movies. camera will no longer sound. To activate sounds again, press the Blocking the microphone may prevent 1 Camera Basics button and choose [Mute] on the [3] tab, and then press audio from being recorded or may Auto Mode / the buttons to choose [Off]. cause the recording to sound muffled. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode • Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when 3 Other Shooting Still Images shooting movies, because sounds made by the camera will be Modes recorded. 4 P Mode • A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be blurred • Once movie recording begins, a smaller image display area is by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a tripod or take Tv, Av, M, and shown, with the subject enlarged, as a measure when correcting 5 C Mode other measures to keep it still. distortion such as rotational camera shake. To shoot subjects at the • If your shots are dark despite the flash firing, move closer to the same size shown before shooting, adjust the image stabilization 6 Playback Mode subject. For details on the flash range, see “Flash Range” (= 206). setting (= 91). • The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once when 7 Wi-Fi Functions you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the focusing • Audio is recorded in stereo. range (shooting range), see “Shooting Range” (= 206). • Distorted audio caused by recording when the wind is strong can be reduced. 8 Setting Menu • To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be However, the recording may sound unnatural when this option is used when activated when shooting in low-light conditions. there is no wind. When the wind is not strong, press the button, 9 Accessories • A blinking [h] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot indicates choose [Wind Filter] on the [4] tab, and then choose [Off] (= 25). that shooting is not possible until the flash has finished recharging. 10 Appendix Shooting can resume as soon as the flash is ready, so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or release it and press Index it again. • The shutter sound will not be played when the Sleeping and Babies (Sleeping) icons (= 34) are displayed. • Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus, brightness, and colors used. 33 Cover Still Images Movies • The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] is dark blue, and the Scene Icons background color of [ ] is orange. Before Use • When shooting movies, only People, Other Subjects, and At Close Range icons will Common Camera In [ ] and [ ] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera be displayed. Operations are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are • When shooting in [ ] mode, only People, Shadows on Face, Other Subjects, and At Basic Guide automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color. Close Range icons will be displayed. Depending on the scene, continuous images may be shot (= 35). • When shooting with the self-timer, People (In Motion), Smiling, Sleeping, Babies Advanced Guide (Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), Children, Other Subjects (In Motion) icons will not be Background Normal Backlit Dark* Sunsets Spotlights Subject displayed. 1 Camera Basics • When the drive mode is set to [ ] (= 35), and when [Hg Lamp Corr.] is set to People – [On] and scenes are automatically corrected (= 48), Smiling, Sleeping, Babies 2 Auto Mode / In Motion ––– (Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children icons will not be displayed. Hybrid Auto Mode • If the flash is set to [ ], the Backlit icons for Smiling and Children will not be Other Shooting Shadows on Face –––– 3 Modes displayed. Smiling ––– • Babies, Babies (Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children icons will be displayed 4 P Mode when [Face ID] is set to [On], and the face of a registered baby (under two years old) Sleeping ––– Tv, Av, M, and or child (from two to twelve years old) is detected (= 41). Confirm beforehand that 5 C Mode Babies ––– the date and time are correct (= 15). Playback Mode Smiling ––– 6 • Try shooting in [G] mode (= 69) if the scene icon does not match ––– Sleeping actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot with your 7 Wi-Fi Functions Children (In Motion) ––– expected effect, color, or brightness. 8 Setting Menu Other Subjects Accessories In Motion ––– 9 At Close Range –– 10 Appendix

* Tripod Used Index The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky, dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds. The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky, and gray for all other backgrounds.

34 Cover Still Images Movies Continuous Shooting Scenes Image Stabilization Icons Before Use If you shoot a still image when the following scene icons are displayed, Common Camera the camera will shoot continuously. If you press the shutter button halfway Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically Operations when one of the icons in the table below is displayed, one of the following applied (Intelligent IS). Additionally, the following icons are displayed in [ ] icons will be displayed to inform you that the camera will shoot continuous and [ ] modes. Basic Guide images: [ ], [ ], or [W]. Image stabilization for movies, Advanced Guide Image stabilization for still reducing strong camera shake, : Consecutive images are captured, and the camera images as when shooting while walking Smiling (including Babies) analyzes details such as facial expressions to save (Dynamic IS) 1 Camera Basics the image determined to be the best. Image stabilization for slow Auto Mode / : Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by Image stabilization for still camera shake, such as when 2 Hybrid Auto Mode combining consecutive shots to reduce camera images when panning* shooting movies at telephoto Other Shooting Sleeping (including Babies) shake and image noise. (Powered IS) 3 Modes The AF-assist beam will not light up, the flash will No image stabilization, because not fire, and the shutter sound will not be played. P Mode Image stabilization for macro the camera is mounted on 4 W: So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children shots (Hybrid IS) a tripod or held still by other Tv, Av, M, and Children who move around, the camera will capture three means 5 C Mode consecutive images for each shot. * Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you follow 6 Playback Mode subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow subjects moving Wi-Fi Functions • In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera shake. 7 may not look as expected. Setting Menu • Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the first shot. • To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (= 91). In this case, an 8 IS icon is not displayed. Accessories • When you want to shoot single images only, press the button, choose • In [ ] mode, no [ ] icon is displayed. 9 [ ] in the menu, and then select [ ]. 10 Appendix

Index

35 Cover Still Images Movies Common, Convenient Features On-Screen Frames Before Use Still Images Movies Common Camera In [ ] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera detects Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom) Operations subjects you are aiming the camera at. • A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face) When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom, Basic Guide determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are use digital zoom for up to about 20x enlargement. Advanced Guide displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects within a certain range to keep them in focus. 1 Move the zoom lever toward 1 Camera Basics However, if the camera detects subject movement, only the white frame . will remain on the screen. Auto Mode / zz Hold the lever until zooming stops. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode • When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera zz Zooming stops at the largest possible Other Shooting detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus and zoom factor (before the image becomes 3 Modes image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF). noticeably grainy), which is then indicated P Mode on the screen. 4 • Try shooting in [G] mode (= 69) if no frames are displayed, if Zoom Factor Tv, Av, M, and frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are 2 Move the zoom lever toward 5 C Mode displayed on the background or similar areas. again. Playback Mode zz The camera zooms in even closer on the 6 • To choose subjects to focus on, touch the desired subject on the screen. [ ] subject. 7 Wi-Fi Functions is displayed, and the camera enters Touch AF mode. Pressing the shutter button halfway will display a blue AF frame, and the camera will keep the 8 Setting Menu subject in focus and image brightness adjusted (Servo AF). 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

36 Cover Still Images Movies • Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths Before Use the zoom position). The color of the zoom bar will change depending (Step Zoom) Common Camera on the zoom range. Operations - White range: optical zoom range where the image will not appear You can shoot at preset focal lengths of 24, 28, 35, 50, 85, 100 or 120 mm Basic Guide grainy. (35mm film equivalent). This is convenient when you want to shoot at the - Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not noticeably angle of view of those focal lengths. grainy (ZoomPlus). Advanced Guide - Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear grainy. zz To change the focal length from 24 to 1 Camera Basics Because the blue range will not be available at some resolution 28 mm, turn the ring settings (= 47), the maximum zoom factor can be achieved by counterclockwise until it clicks. Keep Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode following step 1. turning the ring to increase the focal Other Shooting length, which changes to 35, 50, 85, 100, 3 Modes • Focal length when optical and digital zoom are combined is as follows (35mm and 120 mm at each click. film equivalent). 4 P Mode 24 – 480 mm (24 – 120 mm with optical zoom alone) Tv, Av, M, and • To deactivate digital zoom, press the button, choose [Digital Zoom] Step zoom is not available when shooting movies, so turning the • 5 C Mode on the [4] tab, and then choose [Off]. ring has no effect. 6 Playback Mode • When you are using digital zoom (= 36), you cannot adjust the zoom factor by turning the ring counterclockwise. However, you can set the focal 7 Wi-Fi Functions length to 120 mm by turning it clockwise. 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

37 Cover Still Images Movies zz Once you start the self-timer, the lamp Before Use Using the Self-Timer will blink and the camera will play a self- timer sound. Common Camera With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other timed Operations shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the shutter zz Two seconds before the shot, the blinking button. and sound will speed up. (The lamp will Basic Guide remain lit in case the flash fires.) Advanced Guide 1 Configure the setting. zz To cancel shooting after you have triggered the self-timer, press the zz Press the button, choose [ ] Camera Basics button. 1 in the menu, and then choose the []] zz To restore the original setting, choose Auto Mode / option (= 24). 2 Hybrid Auto Mode [ ] in step 1. zz Once the setting is complete, []] is Other Shooting displayed. 3 Modes Still Images Movies 4 P Mode Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake Tv, Av, M, and This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you have 5 C Mode pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot. 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 2 Shoot. zz Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer” zz For Still Images: Press the shutter button (= 38) and choose [[]. 8 Setting Menu halfway to focus on the subject, and then zz Once the setting is complete, [[] is press it all the way down. displayed. 9 Accessories zz For Movies: Press the movie button. zz Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer” Appendix (= 38) to shoot. 10 Index

38 Cover Still Images Still Images Movies Shooting by Touching the Screen Before Use Customizing the Self-Timer (Touch Shutter) Common Camera You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10). Operations With this option, instead of pressing the shutter button, you can simply Basic Guide 1 Choose [$]. touch the screen and release your finger to shoot. The camera will focus on subjects and adjust image brightness automatically. zz Following step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer” Advanced Guide (= 38), choose [$] and press the < > button. 1 Enable touch-shutter function. 1 Camera Basics zz Press the button, choose Auto Mode / 2 Configure the setting. [Touch Shutter] on the [4] tab, and then 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz Turn the ring to choose the [Delay] choose [On] (= 25). Other Shooting time, either press the buttons or 3 Modes turn the <7> dial to choose the number P Mode of [Shots], and then press the 4 button. Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode zz Once the setting is complete, [$] is displayed. 6 Playback Mode zz Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer” (= 38) to shoot. 7 Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu 2 Choose a subject to focus on. 8 zz Touch the subject on the screen and keep • For movies shot using the self-timer, [Delay] represents the delay 9 Accessories before recording begins, but the [Shots] setting has no effect. your finger on the screen. zz The camera beeps twice after focusing. A 10 Appendix • When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white balance are blue frame is displayed, and the camera Index determined by the first shot. More time is required between shots when the will keep the subject in focus and image flash fires or when you have specified to take many shots. Shooting will stop brightness adjusted (Servo AF). automatically when the memory card becomes full. • When a delay longer than two seconds is specified, two seconds before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the flash fires.)

39 Cover 3 Shoot. 2 Shoot. zz Before Use Release your finger from the screen. A zz As you take shots, the camera adds the shutter sound is played as the camera shooting date or time to the lower-right Common Camera Operations shoots. corner of images. zz To cancel touch shutter, choose [Off] in zz To restore the original setting, choose Basic Guide step 1. [Off] in step 1. Advanced Guide • Even while the shot is displayed, you can prepare for the next shot by touching [^]. • Date stamps cannot be edited or removed. 1 Camera Basics Auto Mode / • In [ ] mode, touching the screen in step 2 will display a green frame, and the 2 Hybrid Auto Mode focus and brightness level will not change. • Shots taken without adding a date stamp can be printed with one as follows. Other Shooting However, adding a date stamp this way to images that already have one may 3 Modes Still Images cause it to be printed twice. 4 P Mode Adding a Date Stamp - Print using printer functions (= 176) - Use camera DPOF print settings (= 180) to print Tv, Av, M, and The camera can add the shooting date to images, in the lower-right corner. - Use the software downloaded from the Canon website to print (= 173) 5 C Mode However, note that date stamps cannot be edited or removed, so confirm 6 Playback Mode beforehand that the date and time are correct (= 15). 7 Wi-Fi Functions 1 Configure the setting. Setting Menu zz Press the button, choose [Date 8 Stamp ] on the [4] tab, and then 9 Accessories choose the desired option (= 25). zz Once the setting is complete, [ ] is 10 Appendix displayed. Index

40 Cover Using Face ID Registering Face ID Information Before Use If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s You can register information (face info, names, birthdays) for up to 12 Common Camera face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when people to use with Face ID. Operations shooting. In [ ] mode, the camera can detect babies and children based Basic Guide on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when shooting. 1 Access the setting screen. This function is also useful when searching for a specific registered person zz Press the button, choose [Face among a large number of images (= 109). Advanced Guide ID Settings] on the [4] tab, and then press the button (= 25). 1 Camera Basics Personal Information Auto Mode / • Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with Face ID, 2 Hybrid Auto Mode and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved on the camera. Other Shooting Additionally, when registered people are detected, their names will be 3 zz Press the

buttons or turn the Modes recorded in still images. When using the Face ID function, be careful when sharing the camera or images with others, and when posting <7> dial to choose [Add to Registry], 4 P Mode and then press the button. images online where many others can view them. 5 Tv, Av, M, and • When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after C Mode using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces, names, 6 Playback Mode and birthdays) from the camera (= 46). 7 Wi-Fi Functions zz Press the

buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose [Add a New Face], 8 Setting Menu and then press the button. 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

41 Cover 2 Register face information. zz To register a birthday, on the [Edit Profile] Before Use zz Aim the camera so that the face of the screen, choose [Birthday] (either press person you want to register is inside the the

buttons or turn the <7> Common Camera Operations gray frame at the center of the screen. dial), and then press the button. zz A white frame on the person’s face zz Press the buttons to choose an Basic Guide indicates that the face is recognized. option. Make sure a white frame is displayed on zz Press the

buttons or turn the Advanced Guide the face, and then shoot. <7> dial to specify the date. Camera Basics zz If the face is not recognized, you cannot zz When finished, press the button. 1 register face information. Auto Mode / 4 Save the settings. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz After [Register?] is displayed, press the zz Press the

buttons or turn the 3 Other Shooting buttons or turn the <7> dial to <7> dial to choose [Save], and then Modes choose [OK], and then press the press the button. 4 P Mode button. zz After a message is displayed, press the Tv, Av, M, and zz The [Edit Profile] screen is displayed. buttons or turn the <7> dial to 5 C Mode choose [Yes], and then press the Playback Mode button. 6 3 Register the person’s name and 5 Continue registering face 7 Wi-Fi Functions birthday. information. Setting Menu zz Press the button to access the zz To register up to 4 more points of face 8 keyboard, and then enter the name information (expressions or angles), 9 Accessories (= 27). repeat step 2. zz Registered faces are more easily 10 Appendix recognized if you add a variety of face information. In addition to a head-on Index angle, add a slight side angle, a shot when smiling, and shots inside and outside.

42 Cover

• The flash will not fire when following step 2. • Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured image or Before Use • If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children icons scene differs drastically from the registered face information. • If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected, overwrite registered Common Camera (= 34) will not be displayed in [ ] mode. Operations information with new face info. Registering face info right before shooting will • You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if you have not allow for easier detection of registered faces. Basic Guide filled all 5 face info slots (= 45). • If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you continue shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the image during Advanced Guide playback (= 112). Shooting • Because faces of babies and children change quickly as they grow, you should 1 Camera Basics update their face info regularly (= 45). If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that person • Names will still be recorded in images even if you clear the [Shooting Info] Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for that check box in [Custom Display] (= 98) on the [4] tab so that the names are person when shooting. not displayed. Other Shooting 3 Modes • If you don’t want names to be recorded in still images, choose [Face ID zz Settings] on the [4] tab, choose [Face ID], and then choose [Off]. 4 P Mode When you point the camera toward a • You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen (simple subject, the names of up to 3 registered information display) (= 106). Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode people will be displayed when they are • In [ ] mode, names are not displayed on the shooting screen, but they will be detected. recorded in still images. 6 Playback Mode zz Shoot. zz Displayed names will be recorded in still 7 Wi-Fi Functions images. Even if people are detected, but Setting Menu their names are not displayed, the names 8 (up to 5 people) will be recorded in the Accessories image. 9 10 Appendix • People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected as the registered person if they share similar facial features. Index

43 Cover Checking and Editing Registered Information 3 Check or edit the information as Before Use needed. 1 Access the [Check/Edit Info] zz To check a name or birthday, access Common Camera Operations screen. the [Edit Profile] screen by pressing the zz Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID

buttons or turning the <7> Basic Guide Information” (= 41), choose [Check/ dial and then pressing the button. Edit Info] and press the button. On the screen displayed, you can edit Advanced Guide names or birthdays as described in step Camera Basics 3 of “Registering Face ID Information” 1 (= 42). Auto Mode / 2 Choose a person to check or 2 Hybrid Auto Mode edit. zz To check face information, choose [Face Info List] (either press the

Other Shooting zz Press the

buttons or 3 Modes turn the <7> dial to choose the person to buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then P Mode check or edit, and then press the press the button. On the screen 4 button. displayed, choose face information to Tv, Av, M, and erase by pressing the

5 C Mode buttons and then the button. After Playback Mode [Erase?] is displayed, choose [OK] (either 6 press the buttons or turn the 7 Wi-Fi Functions <7> dial), and then press the button. 8 Setting Menu

• Even if you change names in [Edit Profile], the names recorded in 9 Accessories previously shot images will remain the same. 10 Appendix • You can use the software to edit registered names. Some characters entered Index with the software may not display on the camera, but will be correctly recorded in images.

44 Cover 3 Choose the face info to Before Use Overwriting and Adding Face Information overwrite. You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should zz Press the

buttons or Common Camera Operations update face information regularly, especially with babies and children, as turn the <7> dial to choose the face info their faces change quickly as they grow. to overwrite, and then press the Basic Guide You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not been button. filled. Advanced Guide

1 Access the [Add Face Info] 4 Register face information. 1 Camera Basics screen. zz Follow step 2 in “Registering Face ID Auto Mode / zz Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID Information” (= 42) to shoot, and then 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Information” (= 41), choose [Add Face register the new face information. 3 Other Shooting Info] and press the button. zz Registered faces are more easily Modes recognized if you add a variety of face 4 P Mode information. In addition to a head-on Tv, Av, M, and 2 angle, add a slight side angle, a shot 5 C Mode Choose the name of the person when smiling, and shots inside and whose face info you want to outside. 6 Playback Mode overwrite. zz Press the

buttons or Wi-Fi Functions • You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are filled. Follow the 7 turn the <7> dial to choose the name steps above to overwrite face information. Setting Menu of a person whose face info you want • You can follow the above steps to register new face info when there is at least 8 to overwrite, and then press the one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite any face information. Instead Accessories button. of overwriting face info, first erase unwanted existing info (= 44), and then 9 zz If five items of face info have already register new face information (= 41) as needed. 10 Appendix been registered, a message will be displayed. Choose [OK] (either press the Index buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then press the button. zz If less than five items of face info are registered, go to step 4 to add face information. 45 Cover Image Customization Features Erasing Registered Information Before Use You can erase information (face info, names, birthdays) registered to Face Still Images Common Camera ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be erased. Changing the Aspect Ratio Operations Basic Guide 1 Access the [Erase Info] screen. Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows. zz Follow step 1 in “Registering Face ID Advanced Guide Information” (= 41) and choose [Erase zz Press the button, choose [ ] in Info]. the menu, and choose the desired option 1 Camera Basics (= 24). Auto Mode / zz Once the setting is complete, the screen 2 Hybrid Auto Mode aspect ratio will be updated. Other Shooting 3 Modes 2 Choose the name of the person zz To restore the original setting, repeat this whose info you want to erase. process but choose [ ]. 4 P Mode zz Press the

buttons or Tv, Av, M, and turn the <7> dial to choose the name 5 C Mode of a person to erase, and then press the 6 Playback Mode button. zz After [Erase?] is displayed, press the 7 Wi-Fi Functions buttons or turn the <7> dial to Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices. Setting Menu choose [OK], and then press the Same aspect ratio as 35mm film, used for printing images at 5 x 7-inch or 8 button. postcard sizes. Accessories Native aspect ratio of the camera screen, also used for display on standard- 9 • If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to definition televisions or similar display devices, or for printing images at 3.5 x 10 Appendix display their name (= 108), search images for them (= 110), or 5-inch or A-series sizes. overwrite their info (= 112). Square aspect ratio. Index

Aspect ratio commonly used for portraits. • You can also erase names in image information (= 113).

• Not available in [ ] mode.

46 Cover Still Images Still Images Changing Image Resolution (Size) Red-Eye Correction Before Use Common Camera Choose from 4 levels of image resolution, as follows. For guidelines on Red-eye that occurs in flash photography can be automatically corrected as Operations how many shots at each resolution setting can fit on a memory card, see follows. “Number of 4:3 Shots per Memory Card” (= 205). Basic Guide

1 Access the [Flash Settings] Advanced Guide zz Press the button, choose [ ] in screen. the menu, and choose the desired option zz Press the button, choose [Flash 1 Camera Basics (= 24). Settings] on the [4] tab, and then press Auto Mode / zz The option you configured is now the button (= 25). 2 Hybrid Auto Mode displayed. Other Shooting zz To restore the original setting, repeat this 3 Modes process but choose [ ]. 4 P Mode Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode 6 Playback Mode 2 Configure the setting. 7 Wi-Fi Functions zz Choose [Red-Eye Corr.], and then Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper Setting Menu choose [On] (= 26). 8 Size (for 4:3 Images) zz Once the setting is complete, [R] is A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.) 9 Accessories zz [ ]: For e-mailing images. displayed. A3 – A5 (11.7 x zz To restore the original setting, repeat this 10 Appendix 16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.) process but choose [Off]. Index 5 x 7 in. Postcard • Red-eye correction may be applied to image areas other than eyes (if 3.5 x 5 in. the camera misinterprets red eye makeup as red pupils, for example).

• You can also correct existing images (= 127). • Not available in [ ] mode. • You can also access the screen in step 2 when the flash is up by pressing the button and immediately pressing the button. 47 Cover Movies • You can also access the screen in step 2 when the flash is up by pressing the Before Use button and then touching [ ]. Changing Movie Image Quality Common Camera 4 image quality settings are available. For guidelines on the maximum Operations movie length at each level of image quality that will fit on a memory card, Still Images see “Recording Time per Memory Card” (= 206). Basic Guide Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Advanced Guide Mercury Lamps zz Press the button, choose [ ] In [ ] mode, subjects or background in shots of evening scenes in the menu, and choose the desired 1 Camera Basics option (= 24). illuminated by mercury lamps may appear to have a greenish tinge. This Auto Mode / greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting, using Multi- zz The option you configured is now 2 Hybrid Auto Mode area White Balance. displayed. Other Shooting zz To restore the original setting, repeat this 3 Modes zz Press the button, choose [Hg process but choose [ ]. 4 P Mode Lamp Corr.] on the [4] tab, and then Tv, Av, M, and choose [On] (= 25). 5 C Mode zz Once the setting is complete, [ ] is displayed. 6 Playback Mode zz To restore the original setting, repeat this Image 7 Wi-Fi Functions process but choose [Off]. Resolution Frame Rate Details Quality 8 Setting Menu 1920 x 1080* 60 fps For shooting in Full HD [ ] enables movies with 9 Accessories 1920 x 1080* 30 fps smoother motion 10 Appendix 1280 x 720 30 fps For shooting in HD Index • After you are finished shooting under mercury lamps, you should set For shooting in standard 640 x 480 30 fps [Hg Lamp Corr.] back to [Off]. Otherwise, green hues not caused by definition mercury lamps may be corrected by mistake. * Fine Detail Movie Processing (This function quickly processes a large amount of information, making it possible to record even finer details in movies.) • Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the desired results.

• In [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes, black bars displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen indicate image areas not recorded. 48 Cover Helpful Shooting Features • If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, press the button, and Before Use on the [4] tab, choose [Custom Display]. Add a [ ] to [ ] or [ ] to choose Still Images Movies the electronic level. Common Camera Operations Using the Electronic Level • Tilting the camera too far forward or backward will prevent you from using the electronic level, which will turn gray. Basic Guide An electronic level can be displayed on the screen when shooting as a • The electronic level is not displayed during movie recording. guideline to determine if the camera is level. • If you hold the camera vertically, the orientation of the electronic level will be Advanced Guide updated automatically to match the camera orientation. 1 Display the electronic level. • If your shots are not level even if you use the electronic level, try calibrating 1 Camera Basics the electronic level (= 162). zz Press the

button several times to Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode display the electronic level. Still Images Other Shooting Magnifying the Area in Focus 3 Modes You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway, which will 4 P Mode enlarge the portion of the image in focus in the AF frame. Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode 1 Configure the setting. 6 Playback Mode zz Press the button, choose [AF- Point Zoom] on the [4] tab, and then 7 Wi-Fi Functions choose [On] (= 25). Setting Menu 2 Level the camera as needed. 8 zz Level the camera so that the center of the 9 Accessories electronic level is green. 10 Appendix

Index

49 Cover Still Images 2 Check the focus. Before Use zz Press the shutter button halfway. The Checking for Closed Eyes face detected as the main subject is now Common Camera [ ] is displayed when the camera detects that people may have closed Operations magnified. their eyes. zz To restore the original setting, choose Basic Guide [Off] in step 1. 1 Configure the setting. Advanced Guide zz Press the button, choose [Blink • The area in focus will not be magnified when you press the shutter Detection] on the [4] tab, and then 1 Camera Basics choose [On] (= 25). button halfway if a face was not detected, if the person is too close Auto Mode / to the camera and their face is too large for the screen, or if the 2 Hybrid Auto Mode camera detects subject movement. Other Shooting 3 Modes • The display will not magnify when using the digital zoom (= 36) or when P Mode using a TV as a display (= 169). 4 • Not available in [ ] mode. Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode 6 Playback Mode 2 Shoot. zz [ ] flashes when the camera detects a 7 Wi-Fi Functions person whose eyes are closed. Setting Menu zz To restore the original setting, choose 8 [Off] in step 1. 9 Accessories • When you have specified multiple shots in [$] mode, this function is only 10 Appendix available for the final shot. • A frame is displayed around people whose eyes are closed when you have Index selected [2 sec.], [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] in [Display Time] (= 52). • This feature is not available during continuous shooting in [ ] mode (= 79).

50 Cover Customizing Camera Operation Still Images Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp Before Use Customize shooting functions on the MENU [4] tab (= 25) as follows. Common Camera For instructions on menu functions, see “Using Menus” (= 25). You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce red- Operations eye when the flash is used in low-light shots. Still Images Basic Guide Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam 1 Access the [Flash Settings] Advanced Guide screen. You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus when zz Press the button, choose [Flash Camera Basics you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions. 1 Settings] on the [4] tab, and then press Auto Mode / the button (= 25). 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz Press the button, choose [AF- 2 Other Shooting assist Beam] on the [4] tab, and then Configure the setting. 3 Modes choose [Off] (= 25). zz Choose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then P Mode zz To restore the original setting, repeat this choose [Off] (= 26). 4 process but choose [On]. zz To restore the original setting, repeat this Tv, Av, M, and process but choose [On]. 5 C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

51 Cover Still Images Changing the Image Display Style after Shots Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots Before Use Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows. Common Camera You can change how long images are displayed and what information is Operations displayed immediately after shooting. 1 Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.], Basic Guide [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] Changing the Image Display Period after Shots (= 52). Advanced Guide 2 Configure the setting. 1 Access the [Review image after zz Press the

buttons or turn the 1 Camera Basics shooting] screen. <7> dial to choose [Display Info]. Press Auto Mode / zz Press the button, choose the buttons to choose the 2 Hybrid Auto Mode [Review image after shooting] on the desired option. Other Shooting 3 Modes [4] tab, and then press the button zz To restore the original setting, repeat this (= 25). process but choose [Off]. 4 P Mode 2 Configure the setting. Off Displays only the image. Tv, Av, M, and zz 5 C Mode Press the

buttons or turn Detailed Displays shooting details (= 192). the <7> dial to choose [Display Time]. 6 Playback Mode Press the buttons to choose the desired option. • When [Display Time] (= 52) is set to [Off] or [Quick], [Display Info] is set to 7 Wi-Fi Functions zz To restore the original setting, repeat this [Off] and cannot be changed. process but choose [Quick]. • By pressing the

button while an image is displayed after shooting, you 8 Setting Menu can switch the display information. Note that the settings of [Display Info] are Quick Displays images only until you can shoot again. not changed. You can also delete the image, by pressing the button. 9 Accessories 2 sec., 4 sec., Displays images for the specified time. Even while the shot is displayed, 8 sec. you can take another shot by pressing the shutter button halfway again. 10 Appendix Hold Displays images until you press the shutter button halfway. Index Off No image display after shots.

52 Cover

Before Use

Common Camera Operations 3 Other Shooting Modes Basic Guide Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and take shots enhanced with unique image effects or Advanced Guide captured using special functions 1 Camera Basics Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting 3 Modes 4 P Mode Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode Specific Scenes...... 54 Shots Resembling Miniature Models Special Modes for Other Purposes...... 61 Image Effects (Creative Filters)...... 56 (Miniature Effect)...... 58 Auto Shooting after Face Detection 6 Playback Mode Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Smart Shutter)...... 61 Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (Toy Camera Effect)...... 59 (High Dynamic Range) ...... 56 Shooting Starry Skies (Star)...... 64 7 Wi-Fi Functions Making Subjects Stand Out Shooting Various Movies...... 67 Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic)...... 57 (Background Defocus)...... 60 Setting Menu Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect...... 60 Shooting Movies in [E] Mode...... 67 8 (Fish-Eye Effect)...... 58 Shooting in Monochrome...... 61 Shooting Super Slow Motion Movies...... 67 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

53 Cover Specific Scenes Still Images Before Use Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will Shoot evening scenes without using Common Camera automatically configure the settings for optimal shots. a tripod (Handheld NightScene) Operations zz Beautiful shots of evening scenes or Basic Guide 1 Enter [K] mode. portraits with evening scenery in the zz Set the mode dial to [K]. background, without the need to hold the Advanced Guide camera very still (as with a tripod). zz A single image is created by combining 1 Camera Basics consecutive shots, reducing camera Auto Mode / shake and image noise. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode 2 Choose a shooting mode. Other Shooting zz Press the button, choose [I] in the Still Images Movies 3 Modes menu, and then choose a shooting mode S Shoot underwater (Underwater) (= 24). 4 P Mode zz Natural-colored shots of sea life and Tv, Av, M, and 3 Shoot. underwater scenery, when you use an 5 C Mode optional waterproof case (= 168). zz This mode can correct white balance and 6 Playback Mode Still Images Movies match the effect of using a commercially 7 Wi-Fi Functions I Shoot portraits (Portrait) available color-compensating filter zz Take shots of people with a softening (= 77). 8 Setting Menu effect. Still Images Movies 9 Accessories P Shoot with snowy backgrounds (Snow) 10 Appendix zz Bright, natural-colored shots of people Index against snowy backgrounds.

54 Cover

Still Images Movies Still Images Before Use t Shoot fireworks (Fireworks) Shooting with an Underwater Focusing Range Common Camera zz Vivid shots of fireworks. If focusing is difficult in [S] mode (= 54) with a focus range of [ ], Operations using a focus range designed for underwater shooting can ensure optimal Basic Guide underwater shots. Advanced Guide 1 Configure the setting. Camera Basics • Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes. zz Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” 1 • In [ ] and [S] modes, shots may look grainy because the ISO (= 54) and choose [S]. Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode speed (= 72) is increased to suit the shooting conditions. zz Press the button, choose the desired • Because the camera will shoot continuously in [ ] mode, hold it Other Shooting focus range (either press the 3 Modes steady while shooting. buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then • In [ ] mode, excessive camera shake or certain shooting press the button. 4 P Mode conditions may prevent you from obtaining the desired results. Tv, Av, M, and • In [t] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures 2 Shoot. 5 C Mode to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should Focusing Range Description set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure Playback Mode Underwater 6 Take close-ups of sea life, using the digital zoom for even closer shots. the camera (= 91). Macro Wi-Fi Functions Avoid missing unexpected underwater shooting opportunities 7 • When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [ ] mode instead Quick when shooting subjects some distance away. Especially effective 8 Setting Menu of [ ] mode will give better results (= 30). for moving subjects. 8 • In [t] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press the shutter f Manual Focus Focus on subjects manually (= 80). button halfway, optimal focus is still determined. 9 Accessories Refer to “Shooting Range” (= 206) for details on the range of each focus range. 10 Appendix In [ ] mode, optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle. • Index • In [ ] mode, use of digital zoom may cause images to appear grainy at some resolutions (= 47). • In [8] mode, subjects at close range may not be in focus. In this case, try setting the focus range to [ ].

• You can also configure this setting by pressing the button, touching the desired focusing range, and then touching it again. 55 Cover Image Effects (Creative Filters) Still Images Movies Before Use Add a variety of effects to images when shooting. Posterized shots (Poster Effect) Common Camera Operations 1 zz Shots that resemble an old poster or Enter [ ] mode. illustration. Basic Guide zz Set the mode dial to [ ]. Advanced Guide

1 Camera Basics • In [ ] and [ ] modes, try taking some test shots first, to make sure 2 Choose a shooting mode. you obtain the desired results. Auto Mode / zz Press the button, choose [ ] in 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting the menu, and then choose a shooting Still Images 3 Modes mode (= 24). Shooting High-Contrast Scenes P Mode (High Dynamic Range) 4 Tv, Av, M, and Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels 5 C Mode 3 Shoot. each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal Playback Mode brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the washed-out 6 Still Images Movies highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tends to occur in high-contrast Wi-Fi Functions Shoot in vivid colors shots. 7 (Super Vivid) 8 Setting Menu zz Shots in rich, vivid colors. 1 Choose [ ]. Accessories zz Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects 9 (Creative Filters)” (= 56) and choose Appendix [ ]. 10 2 Shoot. Index zz Hold the camera steady as you shoot. When you press the shutter button all the way down, the camera will take three shots and combine them.

56 Cover Still Images Movies • Excessive camera shake or certain shooting conditions may prevent Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic) Before Use you from obtaining the desired results. Common Camera This effect makes colors look faded and images look weathered, as in old Operations • If excessive camera shake interferes with shooting, mount the camera on photographs. Choose from five effect levels. a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally, you should set Basic Guide [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera 1 (= 91). Choose [ ]. Advanced Guide • Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry. zz Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects • There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes (Creative Filters)” (= 56) and choose 1 Camera Basics and combines the images. [ ]. 2 Auto Mode / 2 Choose an effect level. Hybrid Auto Mode Adding Artistic Effects Other Shooting zz Turn the ring to choose an effect 3 Modes zz Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects level. (Creative Filters)” (= 56) and choose zz A preview is shown of how your shot will 4 P Mode [ ]. look with the effect applied. Tv, Av, M, and zz Press the

button, choose an effect 5 C Mode (either press the buttons or turn 3 6 Playback Mode the <7> dial), and then press the Shoot. button. Wi-Fi Functions • Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired 7 Natural Images are natural and organic. results. Setting Menu Art Standard Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast. 8 Art Vivid Images resemble vivid illustrations. • Colors will look faded on the shooting screen, but the image aging effect is not 9 Accessories Art Bold Images resemble oil paintings, with bold edges. shown. Review the image in Playback mode to see the effect (= 104). • The image aging effect is not shown in movies. Appendix Images resemble old photos, with bold edges and dark 10 Art Embossed ambiance. Index

57 Cover Still Images Still Images Movies Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect Shots Resembling Miniature Models Before Use (Fish-Eye Effect) (Miniature Effect) Common Camera Operations Shoot with the distorting effect of a fish-eye lens. Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above and Basic Guide below your selected area. You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by 1 Choose [ ]. Advanced Guide choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and zz Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is Camera Basics (Creative Filters)” (= 56) and choose not recorded. 1 [ ]. Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode 2 Choose an effect level. 1 Choose [ ]. Other Shooting zz Turn the ring to choose an effect zz Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects 3 Modes level. (Creative Filters)” ( 56) and choose = P Mode [ ]. 4 3 Shoot. zz A white frame is displayed, indicating the Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode image area that will not be blurred. 6 Playback Mode 2 Choose the area to keep in • Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired focus. 7 Wi-Fi Functions results. zz Press the

button. zz Move the zoom lever to resize the frame, 8 Setting Menu and turn the <7> dial to move it. 9 Accessories 10 Appendix 3 For movies, choose the movie playback speed. Index zz Turn the ring to choose the speed. 4 Return to the shooting screen and shoot. zz Press the button to return to the shooting screen, and then shoot. 58 Cover Still Images Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect Before Use (for One-Minute Clips) (Toy Camera Effect) Common Camera Speed Playback Time Operations This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting Basic Guide Approx. 12 sec. (darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color. Approx. 6 sec. Advanced Guide Approx. 3 sec. 1 Choose [ ]. zz Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects 1 Camera Basics (Creative Filters)” (= 56) and choose Auto Mode / • The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set the [ ]. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zoom before shooting. Other Shooting • Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired 2 Choose a color tone. 3 Modes results. zz Turn the ring to choose a color tone. P Mode zz A preview is shown of how your shot will 4 • To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the buttons look with the effect applied. Tv, Av, M, and in step 2. To return the frame to horizontal orientation, press the

5 C Mode buttons. 3 Shoot. Playback Mode • To move the frame when it is in horizontal orientation, press the

6 buttons, and to move the frame when it is in vertical orientation, press the Wi-Fi Functions buttons. Standard Shots resemble toy camera images. 7 • Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the frame. Warm Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard]. Setting Menu • Movie image quality is [ ] at an aspect ratio of [ ] and [ ] at an aspect 8 ratio of [ ] (= 46). These quality settings cannot be changed. Cool Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard]. 9 Accessories • You can also move the frame by touching or dragging across the screen. • Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired 10 Appendix results. Index

59 Cover Still Images Still Images Making Subjects Stand Out Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect Before Use (Background Defocus) Common Camera This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus filter were Operations Two consecutive images are captured each time you shoot and processed attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired. Basic Guide into a single image, so that the subject stands out against a blurred background. 1 Choose [ ]. Advanced Guide zz Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects 1 Choose [ ]. (Creative Filters)” (= 56) and choose 1 Camera Basics zz [ ]. Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects 2 Auto Mode / (Creative Filters)” (= 56) and choose 2 Choose an effect level. Hybrid Auto Mode [ ]. Other Shooting zz Turn the ring to choose an effect 3 Modes 2 Shoot. level. P Mode zz Hold the camera steady as you shoot. zz A preview is shown of how your shot will 4 When you press the shutter button all the look with the effect applied. Tv, Av, M, and way down, the camera will shoot twice 5 C Mode 3 Shoot. and process the images. 6 Playback Mode zz A blinking [ ] icon indicates that the images could not be processed. • Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired 7 Wi-Fi Functions results. Setting Menu • Excessive camera shake or certain shooting conditions may prevent 8 you from obtaining the desired results. 9 Accessories

• For the best results with this effect, try shooting close to the subject, and Appendix ensure ample distance between the subject and background. 10 • There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes Index the images. • To adjust the effect level, turn the ring.

60 Cover Still Images Movies Special Modes for Other Purposes Shooting in Monochrome Before Use Still Images Common Camera Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white. Auto Shooting after Face Detection Operations Basic Guide 1 Choose [ ]. (Smart Shutter) zz Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects Advanced Guide (Creative Filters)” (= 56) and choose Auto Shooting after Smile Detection [ ]. The camera shoots automatically after detecting a smile, even without you 1 Camera Basics pressing the shutter button. 2 Choose a color tone. Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz Turn the ring to choose a color tone. 1 Choose [ ]. Other Shooting zz A preview is shown of how your shot will zz Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” 3 Modes look with the effect applied. (= 54) and choose [ ], and then 4 P Mode 3 Shoot. press the

button. zz Tv, Av, M, and Press the buttons or turn the 5 C Mode <7> dial to choose [ ], and then press B/W Black and white shots. the button. 6 Playback Mode Sepia Sepia tone shots. zz The camera now enters shooting standby Wi-Fi Functions Blue Blue and white shots. mode, and [Smile Detection on] is 7 displayed. 8 Setting Menu 2 Aim the camera at a person. Accessories zz Each time the camera detects a smile, it 9 will shoot after the lamp lights up. 10 Appendix zz To pause smile detection, press the button. Press the button again to Index resume detection.

• Switch to another mode when you finish shooting, or the camera will continue shooting each time a smile is detected.

61 Cover

• You can also shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button. 3 Press the shutter button all the Before Use • The camera can detect smiles more easily when subjects face the camera and way down. open their mouth wide enough so that teeth are visible. zz The camera now enters shooting standby Common Camera Operations • To change the number of shots, press the

buttons after choosing mode, and [Wink to take picture] is [ ] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (= 50) is only available for the final shot. displayed. Basic Guide zz The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound • You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps 1 – 2 of Advanced Guide is played. “Specific Scenes” (= 54), touching [ ] to access the setting screen, touching [ ], and then touching the same option or [ ]. 4 Face the camera and wink. 1 Camera Basics zz The camera will shoot about two seconds Auto Mode / Still Images after detecting a wink by the person 2 Hybrid Auto Mode whose face is inside the frame. Other Shooting Using the Wink Self-Timer 3 Modes Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button all the way down. zz To cancel shooting after you have The camera will shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected. triggered the self-timer, press the 4 P Mode < > button. n 5 Tv, Av, M, and 1 Choose [ ]. C Mode • If the wink is not detected, wink again slowly and deliberately. zz Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” Playback Mode • Winking may not be detected if eyes are obscured by hair, a hat, or glasses. 6 (= 54) and choose [ ], and then • Closing and opening both eyes at once will also be detected as a wink. Wi-Fi Functions press the

button. • If winking is not detected, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later. 7 zz Press the buttons or turn the • To change the number of shots, press the

buttons after choosing Setting Menu <7> dial to choose [ ], and then press [ ] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (= 50) is only available for the final shot. 8 • If no one is in the shooting area when the shutter button is pressed all the way the button. Accessories down, the camera will shoot after a person enters the shooting area and winks. 9 2 Compose the shot and press Appendix the shutter button halfway. • You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps 1 – 2 of 10 zz On the screen, touch the face of the “Specific Scenes” (= 54), touching [ ] to access the setting screen, Index person who will wink to choose it (Touch touching [ ], and then touching the same option or [ ]. AF), and then press the shutter button halfway. zz Make sure a green frame is displayed around the face of the person who will wink. 62 Cover 4 Join the subjects in the Still Images Before Use shooting area and look at the Using the Face Self-Timer camera. Common Camera Operations The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face of zz After the camera detects a new face, the another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting area lamp blinking and self-timer sound will Basic Guide (= 83). This is useful when including yourself in group photos or similar speed up. (When the flash fires, the lamp shots. will remain lit.) About two seconds later, Advanced Guide the camera will shoot. Camera Basics 1 Choose [ ]. zz To cancel shooting after you have 1 zz Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” triggered the self-timer, press the 2 Auto Mode / (= 54) and choose [ ], and then button. Hybrid Auto Mode press the

button. Other Shooting 3 Modes zz Press the buttons or turn the • Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the shooting area, <7> dial to choose [ ], and then press the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later. 4 P Mode • To change the number of shots, press the

buttons after choosing the button. Tv, Av, M, and [ ] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (= 50) is only available for the final shot. 5 C Mode 2 Compose the shot and press the shutter button halfway. • You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps 1 – 2 of 6 Playback Mode zz Make sure a green frame is displayed “Specific Scenes” (= 54), touching [ ] to access the setting screen, Wi-Fi Functions around the face you focus on and white touching [ ], and then touching the same option or [ ]. 7 frames around other faces. 8 Setting Menu 3 Press the shutter button all the Accessories way down. 9 zz The camera now enters shooting standby 10 Appendix mode, and [Look straight at camera to start count down] is displayed. Index zz The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound is played.

63 Cover Shooting Starry Skies (Star) • There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes Before Use and combines the images. • To disable image processing that makes stars more prominent, choose MENU Common Camera Still Images Operations ► [4] tab ► [Star Emphasis] ► [Off]. Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies • Set [Night Display] to [On] (= 92) in this mode. Basic Guide Switch to manual focus mode (= 80) to more accurately specify the focal (Star Nightscape) • position before shooting. Advanced Guide Capture impressive shots of starry skies above night scenes. Starlight in the • This mode can correct white balance and match the effect of using a image is automatically enhanced, making starry skies look beautiful. commercially available color-compensating filter (= 77). 1 Camera Basics Auto Mode / Still Images 1 Choose [ ]. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” Other Shooting (= 54) and choose [ ], and then Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails) 3 Modes press the

button. Streaks created by the movement of stars through the sky are recorded in a single image. After determining the and number of shots, the P Mode zz Press the buttons or turn the 4 camera shoots continuously. Each shooting session lasts up to about <7> dial to choose [ ], and then press Tv, Av, M, and 1.5 hours, and many shots are taken. Check the battery level and memory 5 C Mode the button. card space in advance. Playback Mode 2 Secure the camera. 6 zz Mount the camera on a tripod or take 1 Choose [ ]. 7 Wi-Fi Functions other measures to keep it still and zz Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” prevent camera shake. (= 54) and choose [ ], and then 8 Setting Menu press the

button. 3 Shoot. Accessories zz Press the buttons or turn the 9 <7> dial to choose [ ], and then press Appendix the button. 10 2 Specify the duration of the Index shooting session. zz Turn the ring to choose the shooting duration. • Optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted. • Under some shooting conditions, images may not look as expected.

64 Cover 3 Secure the camera. Movies zz Mount the camera on a tripod or take Before Use other measures to keep it still. Shooting Movies of Star Movement Common Camera Operations 4 Shoot. (Star Time-Lapse Movie) zz Press the shutter button all the way Still images are captured continuously over a specified duration and Basic Guide down. [Busy] is displayed briefly, and combined to create a movie. The camera shoots once each minute, and no Advanced Guide then shooting begins. sound is recorded. Stars move quickly during playback, so you can view their movement zz Do not disturb the camera while shooting. in a short time. Each shooting session lasts up to about two hours, and 1 Camera Basics zz To cancel shooting, press the shutter many shots are taken. Check the battery level and memory card space in Auto Mode / button all the way down again. advance. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting 3 Modes • If the camera runs out of battery power, shooting stops and a 1 Choose [ ]. composite image created from the images up to that point is saved. zz Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” P Mode • Optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted. 4 (= 54) and choose [ ], and then 5 Tv, Av, M, and • There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes press the

button. C Mode zz Press the < >< > buttons or turn the and combines the images. q r 6 Playback Mode • Set [Night Display] to [On] (= 92) in this mode. <7> dial to choose [ ], and then press • Switch to manual focus mode (= 80) to more accurately specify the focal the button. Wi-Fi Functions position before shooting. 7 2 Specify the duration of the • This mode can correct white balance and match the effect of using a 8 Setting Menu commercially available color-compensating filter (= 77). shooting session. zz Turn the ring to choose the shooting 9 Accessories duration. Appendix 3 Secure the camera. 10 zz Mount the camera on a tripod or take Index other measures to keep it still.

65 Cover 4 Check the brightness. • If the camera runs out of battery power or memory card space, Before Use zz Press the shutter button all the way down shooting stops and a movie created from the images up to that point to shoot a single still image. Common Camera is saved. Operations zz Switch to Playback mode (= 103) and • Maximum available shooting duration varies depending on free check image brightness. space on the memory card. Basic Guide zz To adjust the brightness, press the • Optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted. Advanced Guide button on the shooting screen and • There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes change the exposure level by turning the Camera Basics <7> dial. Check brightness again by the images. 1 To save each shot collected before the movie is created, choose MENU ► taking another shot. • Auto Mode / [4] tab ► [Save Stills] ► [On]. Note that these individual images are 2 Hybrid Auto Mode 5 Shoot. managed as a single group, and during playback, only the first image is Other Shooting displayed. To indicate that the image is part of a group, [ ] is displayed 3 zz Press the movie button. [Busy] is Modes in the upper left of the screen. If you erase a grouped image (= 118), all displayed briefly, and then shooting images in the group are also erased. Be careful when erasing images. 4 P Mode begins. • Set [Night Display] to [On] (= 92) in this mode. Tv, Av, M, and zz Do not disturb the camera while shooting. • Switch to manual focus mode (= 80) to more accurately specify the focal 5 C Mode zz To cancel shooting, press the movie position before shooting. Playback Mode button again. • This mode can correct white balance and match the effect of using a 6 commercially available color-compensating filter (= 77). zz The camera operates in Eco mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions (= 159) while shooting. 8 Setting Menu Estimated Shooting and Playback Times Session Time Playback Time 9 Accessories [120'] Approx. 8 sec. Appendix [90'] Approx. 6 sec. 10 [60'] Approx. 4 sec. Index

66 Cover Movies 2 Adjust the exposure. Shooting Various Movies zz Turn the <7> dial to adjust the exposure, Before Use as you watch the screen. Common Camera Shooting Movies in [E] Mode Operations 3 Shoot (= 67). Basic Guide 1 Enter [E] mode. Movies zz Set the mode dial to [E]. Advanced Guide zz Black bars are displayed on the top and Shooting Super Slow Motion Movies Camera Basics bottom edges of the screen, and the You can shoot fast-moving subjects for playback later in slow motion. Note 1 subject is slightly enlarged. The black that sound is not recorded. Auto Mode / bars indicate image areas not recorded. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode 1 Other Shooting 2 Choose [ ]. Configure the settings to suit zz Set the mode dial to [E]. 3 Modes the movie (= 193 – 202). zz Press the button, choose [E] 4 P Mode 3 Shoot. in the menu, and then choose [ ] Tv, Av, M, and zz Press the movie button. (= 24). 5 C Mode zz To stop movie recording, press the movie 2 Choose a frame rate. Playback Mode button again. 6 zz Press the button, choose [ ] Movies in the menu, and choose the desired 7 Wi-Fi Functions frame rate (= 24). Setting Menu Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Shooting zz The option you configured is now 8 Before shooting, you can lock the exposure or change it in 1/3-stop displayed. increments within a range of –3 to +3. 9 Accessories 10 Appendix 1 Lock the exposure. zz Press the button to lock the Index exposure. The exposure shift bar is displayed. zz To unlock the exposure, press the button again.

67 Cover 3 Shoot (= 67). Before Use

Common Camera Operations Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Playback Time Frame Rate Image Quality Camera Basics (For a 30-sec. Clip) 1 240 fps (320 x 240) Approx. 4 min. Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode 120 fps (640 x 480) Approx. 2 min. Other Shooting 3 Modes

P Mode • Zooming is not available during recording, even if you move the 4 zoom lever. Tv, Av, M, and • Focus, exposure, and color are determined when you press the 5 C Mode movie button. 6 Playback Mode • When you play the movie (= 104), it will be played back in slow motion. 7 Wi-Fi Functions • You can change the playback speed of movies by using the software (= 173). 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

68 Cover

Before Use

Common Camera Operations 4 P Mode Basic Guide More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting 3 Modes

P Mode • Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode dial set to [G] mode. 4 Tv, Av, M, and • [G]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure 5 C Mode • Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other than [G], make sure the function is available in that mode Playback Mode (= 193 – 202). 6 7 Wi-Fi Functions Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)...... 70 Color and Continuous Shooting...... 76 Flash...... 87 8 Setting Menu Image Brightness (Exposure)...... 70 Adjusting White Balance...... 76 Changing the Flash Mode...... 87 Adjusting Image Brightness Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)...... 78 Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation...... 88 9 Accessories (Exposure Compensation)...... 70 Continuous Shooting...... 79 Shooting with the FE Lock...... 89 Locking Image Brightness / Exposure Shooting Range and Focusing...... 80 Changing the Flash Timing...... 89 10 Appendix (AE Lock)...... 71 Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)...... 80 Shooting RAW Images...... 90 Changing the Metering Method...... 71 Shooting in Manual Focus Mode...... 80 Other Settings...... 91 Index Changing the ISO Speed...... 72 Digital Tele-Converter...... 82 Changing the Compression Ratio Changing the Noise Reduction Level Changing the AF Frame Mode...... 82 (Image Quality)...... 91 (High ISO NR)...... 73 Changing the Focus Setting...... 84 Changing the IS Mode Settings...... 91 Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)...... 74 Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)...... 85 Switching the Color of Shooting-Screen Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)...... 74 Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF)...... 86 Information...... 92 Using the ND Filter...... 75 Shooting with the AF Lock...... 87

69 Cover Still Images Movies Image Brightness (Exposure) Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode) Before Use Still Images Movies Common Camera You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting Operations style. Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation) Basic Guide 1 Enter [G] mode. The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop Advanced Guide zz Set the mode dial to [G]. increments, in a range of –3 to +3. 1 Camera Basics zz Press the button. As you watch Auto Mode / the screen, turn the <7> dial to adjust 2 Hybrid Auto Mode brightness, and then press the Other Shooting 3 Modes 2 Customize the settings as button again when finished. desired (= 70 – 92), and zz The correction level you specified is now 4 P Mode then shoot. displayed. Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode • If adequate exposure cannot be obtained when you press the shutter button halfway, shutter speeds and aperture values are displayed in orange. In this • You can also adjust the correction level by touching the right edge of the 6 Playback Mode case, try adjusting the ISO speed (= 72) or activating the flash (if subjects screen while turning the ring (= 98). are dark, = 87), which may enable adequate exposure. 7 Wi-Fi Functions • Movies can be recorded in [G] mode as well, by pressing the movie button. However, some FUNC. (= 24) and MENU (= 25) settings may be 8 Setting Menu automatically adjusted for movie recording. • For details on the shooting range in [G] mode, see “Shooting Range” 9 Accessories (= 206). 10 Appendix

Index

70 Cover Still Images Still Images Locking Image Brightness / Exposure Changing the Metering Method Before Use (AE Lock) Common Camera Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting Operations Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and conditions as follows. Basic Guide exposure separately. zz Press the button, choose [ ] in Advanced Guide 1 Lock the exposure. the menu, and choose the desired option zz Aim the camera at the subject to shoot (= 24). 1 Camera Basics zz The option you configured is now with the exposure locked. With the Auto Mode / shutter button pressed halfway, press the displayed. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode button. 3 Other Shooting zz [ ] is displayed, and the exposure is Modes For typical shooting conditions, including backlit shots. locked. Evaluative 4 P Mode zz To unlock AE, release the shutter button Automatically adjusts exposure to match the shooting conditions. Tv, Av, M, and Determines the average brightness of light across the entire and press the button again. In this Center 5 C Mode image area, calculated by treating brightness in the central area case, [ ] is no longer displayed. Weighted Avg. as more important. 6 Playback Mode 2 Compose the shot and shoot. Spot Metering restricted to within the [ ] (Spot AE Point frame). You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame (= 72). 7 Wi-Fi Functions • AE: Auto Exposure Setting Menu • After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination of shutter speed 8 and aperture value by turning the <7> dial (Program Shift). 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

71 Cover Still Images Still Images Changing the ISO Speed Before Use Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame Common Camera zz Turn the ring to choose the ISO Operations 1 Set the metering method to [ ]. speed. Basic Guide zz Follow the steps in “Changing the zz The option you configured is now Metering Method” (= 71) to choose displayed. Advanced Guide [ ]. 2 Configure the setting. 1 Camera Basics zz Press the button, choose Auto Mode / [Spot AE Point] on the [4] tab, and then Automatically adjusts the ISO speed to suit the 2 Hybrid Auto Mode choose [AF Point] (= 25). shooting mode and conditions. Other Shooting zz 3 Modes The Spot AE Point frame will now be For shooting outdoors in fair weather. linked to the movement of the AF frame P Mode Low For shooting in cloudy conditions, or at 4 (= 83). twilight. Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode

• Not available when [AF Frame] is set to [Face AiAF] (= 83). High For shooting night scenes, or in dark rooms. 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions • To view the automatically set ISO speed when the camera is set to [ ], press the shutter button halfway. 8 Setting Menu • Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject blurriness in some shooting conditions. 9 Accessories • Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which may reduce subject blurriness and increase the flash range. However, shots may look 10 Appendix grainy. • You can also set the ISO speed by pressing the button, choosing [ ], Index choosing an option (either by pressing the buttons or turning the <7> dial), and then pressing the button. To specify [ ], press the < > button on the setting screen.

72 Cover Changing the Noise Reduction Level Still Images Before Use (High ISO NR) Adjusting the Setting Common Camera You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], [High], [Low]. Operations When the camera is set to [ ], maximum ISO speed can be specified in This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds. a range of [ ] – [ ], and sensitivity can be specified in a range of three Basic Guide levels. zz Press the button, choose [High Advanced Guide 1 Access the setting screen. ISO NR] on the [4] tab, and then choose zz Press the button, choose [ISO the desired option (= 25). 1 Camera Basics Auto Settings] on the [4] tab, and then Auto Mode / press the button (= 25). 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting 2 Configure the setting. 3 Modes zz Choose a menu item to configure, and 4 P Mode then choose the desired option (= 26). • Not available with [ ] or [ ] (= 90). Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode 6 Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions • You can also access the [ISO Auto Settings] screen when choosing the ISO 7 speed in the FUNC. menu, by pressing the button. 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

73 Cover Still Images • To access the setting screen in step 2, you can either touch [ ] on Before Use Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting) the screen in step 1 or touch [ ] on the exposure compensation screen (= 70). Common Camera Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels Operations (standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each time • You can also configure this setting by touching or dragging the bar on the you shoot. You can adjust the amount of underexposure and overexposure setting screen in step 2 to specify a value and then touching [ ]. Basic Guide (relative to standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in 1/3-stop increments. Still Images Advanced Guide Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) 1 Choose [ ]. 1 Camera Basics zz Press the button, choose Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or Auto Mode / [ ] in the menu, and then choose [ ] backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal 2 Hybrid Auto Mode (= 24). brightness. Other Shooting To avoid washed-out highlights, specify Dynamic Range Correction. To 3 Modes preserve image detail in shadows, specify Shadow Correct. 4 P Mode • Under some shooting conditions, correction may be inaccurate or Tv, Av, M, and 2 Configure the setting. may cause images to appear grainy. 5 C Mode zz Press the < > button, and then adjust 6 Playback Mode the setting by pressing the • You can also correct existing images (= 126). buttons or turning the <7> dial. • You can customize camera operation so that turning the ring adjusts DR 7 Wi-Fi Functions Correction or Shadow Correct settings (= 96). 8 Setting Menu

Accessories • AEB shooting is only available in [!] mode (= 88). 9 • Continuous shooting (= 79) is not available in this mode. 10 Appendix

• If exposure compensation is already in use (= 70), the value specified for Index that function is treated as the standard exposure level for this function. • You can also access the setting screen of step 2 by pressing the button when the exposure compensation screen (= 70) is displayed. • Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in [$] (= 39). • In [Blink Detection] mode (= 50), this function is only available for the final shot. 74 Cover

Still Images Still Images Before Use Dynamic Range Correction (DR Correction) Shadow Correct Common Camera Tone down bright image areas, which might otherwise look washed out, as Automatically preserve image detail in shadows as follows. Operations follows. Basic Guide zz Press the button, choose Advanced Guide zz Press the button, choose [ ] in [ ] in the menu, and then choose [ ] the menu, and choose the desired option (= 24). 1 Camera Basics (= 24). zz Once the setting is complete, [ ] is displayed. Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting 3 Modes

P Mode Available ISO Speed Using the ND Filter 4 Option Details (= 72) Tv, Av, M, and To shoot at slower shutter speeds and smaller aperture values, use the ND 5 C Mode – filter, which reduces light intensity to 1/8 the actual level (equivalent to 3 stops). Automatic adjustment to prevent washed-out 6 Playback Mode highlights [ ], [ ] – [ ] zz Press the button, choose Wi-Fi Functions Tone down highlights by about 200% relative [ ] in the menu, and then choose [ ] 7 to the brightness level of [ ]. [ ], [ ] – [ ] (= 24). Setting Menu Tone down highlights by about 400% relative 8 to the brightness level of [ ]. [ ], [ ] – [ ] 9 Accessories

• ISO speed (= 72) will be adjusted to a speed within the 10 Appendix supported range if you have specified a value outside the supported Index range indicated here. • Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera (= 91).

• ND: Neutral Density

75 Cover Color and Continuous Shooting Still Images Movies Before Use Still Images Movies Custom White Balance Common Camera Adjusting White Balance For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white Operations balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white Basic Guide By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot. natural for the scene you are shooting. Advanced Guide zz Follow the steps in “Adjusting White Camera Basics zz Press the button, choose [ ] in Balance” (= 76) to choose [ ] or [ ]. 1 the menu, and choose the desired option zz Aim the camera at a plain white subject, Auto Mode / ( 24). 2 Hybrid Auto Mode = so that the entire screen is white. Press zz Other Shooting The option you configured is now the < > button. 3 displayed. Modes zz The tint of the screen changes once the white balance data has been recorded. 4 P Mode Tv, Av, M, and Automatically sets the optimal white balance for the shooting 5 C Mode Auto • Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after conditions. recording white balance data. Playback Mode Day Light For shooting outdoors in fair weather. 6 Cloudy For shooting in cloudy conditions, in the shade, or at twilight. • You can also record white balance data on the screen above by 7 Wi-Fi Functions touching [ ]. For shooting under ordinary incandescent (tungsten) lighting Tungsten Setting Menu and similarly colored fluorescent lighting. 8 For shooting under warm-white (or similarly colored) or cool- Fluorescent Accessories white fluorescent lighting. 9 For shooting under daylight fluorescent and similarly colored Appendix Fluorescent H 10 fluorescent lighting. h Flash For shooting with the flash. Index Sets the optimal white balance for shooting underwater. Tones Underwater S down blues to produce natural-looking colors overall. Custom For manually setting a custom white balance (= 76).

76 Cover

Still Images Movies • B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green Before Use • You can customize camera operation so that the B and A adjustment screen Manually Correcting White Balance can be accessed simply by turning the ring (= 96). Common Camera Operations You can correct white balance. This adjustment can match the effect of • One level of blue/amber correction is equivalent to about 7 mireds on a color using a commercially available color temperature conversion filter or color- temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Color temperature unit representing color Basic Guide compensating filter. temperature conversion filter density) Advanced Guide 1 Configure the setting. • You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging the bar in step 1 or the frame in step 2. 1 Camera Basics zz Follow the steps in “Adjusting White • You can also access the screen in step 2 by touching [ ] in step 1. Auto Mode / Balance” (= 76) to choose the white • On the screen in step 2, you can touch [ ] to restore the original level and 2 Hybrid Auto Mode balance option. touch [ ] to return to the shooting screen. Other Shooting zz Turn the ring to adjust the correction 3 Modes level for B and A. P Mode zz Once the setting is complete, [ ] is 4 displayed. Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode 2 Configure advanced settings. Playback Mode zz To configure more advanced settings, 6 press the button and adjust 7 Wi-Fi Functions the correction level by turning the ring or <7> dial or pressing the 8 Setting Menu

buttons. zz To reset the correction level, press the 9 Accessories < > button. Appendix zz Press the button to complete 10 the setting. Index

• The camera will retain white balance correction levels even if you switch to another white balance option in step 1, but correction levels will be reset if you record custom white balance data.

77 Cover Still Images Movies Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) • White balance (= 76) cannot be set in [ ] or [ ] modes. Before Use • With [ ] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone may Common Camera Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia change. These settings may not produce the expected results with Operations or black and white. some skin tones. Basic Guide Still Images Movies zz Press the button, choose [ ] in Advanced Guide the menu, and choose the desired option Custom Color (= 24). Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation, 1 Camera Basics zz The option you configured is now red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5. Auto Mode / displayed. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode 1 Access the setting screen. Other Shooting 3 Modes zz Follow the steps in “Changing Image My Colors Off – Color Tones (My Colors)” (= 78) to 4 P Mode Emphasizes contrast and color saturation, making images Vivid choose [ ], and then press the < > sharper. Tv, Av, M, and button. 5 C Mode Neutral Tones down contrast and color saturation for subdued images. Playback Mode Sepia Creates sepia tone images. 6 2 Configure the setting. Wi-Fi Functions B/W Creates black and white images. zz Press the

buttons to choose 7 Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid Green, and Vivid an option, and then specify the value by Setting Menu Positive Film Red to produce intense yet natural-looking colors resembling pressing the buttons or turning 8 images on positive film. the <7> dial. 9 Accessories Lighter Skin Tone Lightens skin tones. zz For stronger/more intense effects (or Darker Skin Tone Darkens skin tones. darker skin tones), adjust the value to 10 Appendix Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky, ocean, and other the right, and for weaker/lighter effects Vivid Blue Index blue subjects more vivid. (or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to Emphasizes greens in images. Makes mountains, foliage, and the left. Vivid Green other green subjects more vivid. zz Press the < > button to complete the Vivid Red Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red subjects more vivid. setting. Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation, and other Custom Color qualities as desired (= 78). • You can also specify a value by touching or dragging the bar. 78 Cover Still Images Continuous Shooting • Cannot be used with the self-timer (= 38) or [Blink Detection] Before Use (= 50). Common Camera Hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously. • Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow Operations For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Continuous Shooting down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the Speed” (= 206). zoom position. Basic Guide • As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down. Advanced Guide 1 Configure the setting. • Shooting may slow down if the flash fires. zz • With Touch Shutter (= 39), the camera will only take one shot Press the button, choose [ ] in instead of shooting continuously. 1 Camera Basics the menu, and choose the desired option Auto Mode / (= 24). • When using Face ID (= 41), the location in the image where the name is 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz The option you configured is now recorded will be determined in the first shot, and will be recorded in the same Other Shooting displayed. place for further shots. 3 Modes 4 P Mode 2 Shoot. Images Displayed during Playback zz Hold the shutter button all the way down Tv, Av, M, and Each set of images shot continuously in [G], [M], [B], or [D] mode is 5 C Mode to shoot continuously. managed as a single group, and only the first image in that group will be Playback Mode Mode Description displayed. To indicate that the image is part of a group, [ ] is displayed 6 in the upper left of the screen. Continuous shooting, with the focus and exposure determined W Continuous Wi-Fi Functions when you press the shutter button halfway. 7 • If you erase a grouped image (= 118), all images in the group are Continuous Continuous shooting and focusing. 8 Setting Menu Shooting AF* [AF Frame] is set to [1-point] and cannot be changed. also erased. Be careful when erasing images. Accessories * In [t] mode (= 55), manual focus mode (= 80), or when AF is locked • Grouped images can be played back individually (= 111) and ungrouped 9 (= 87), [ ] is changed to [ ]. (= 112). Appendix • Protecting (= 116) a grouped image will protect all images in the group. 10 Grouped images can be viewed individually when played back using Image • Index Search (= 109) or Smart Shuffle (= 115). In this case, images are temporarily ungrouped. • These actions are not available for grouped images: editing Face ID information (= 112), magnifying (= 113), tagging as favorites (= 121), editing (= 124 – 127), printing (= 176), setting up individual image printing (= 180), or adding to a photobook (= 182). To do these things, either view grouped images individually (= 111) or cancel grouping (= 112) first. 79 Cover Shooting Range and Focusing Still Images Movies Shooting in Manual Focus Mode Before Use Still Images Common Camera When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can Operations Shooting Close-Ups (Macro) specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button halfway to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the position you Basic Guide To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [e]. For specified. For details on the focusing range, see “Shooting Range” (= 206). details on the focusing range, see “Shooting Range” (= 206). Advanced Guide 1 f zz Press the button, choose [e] (either Choose [ ]. 1 Camera Basics zz Press the button, choose [f] press the buttons or turn the Auto Mode / <7> dial), and then press the (either press the buttons or turn 2 Hybrid Auto Mode button. the <7> dial), and then press the Other Shooting button. 3 zz Once the setting is complete, [e] is Modes zz [f] and the MF indicator are displayed. displayed. 4 P Mode Tv, Av, M, and 2 Specify the general focal 5 C Mode • If the flash fires, vignetting may occur. With the AF frame mode set to [Face AiAF], using Touch Shutter position. • zz 6 Playback Mode returns the camera to [ ]. Referring to the on-screen MF indicator bar (which shows the distance and focal 7 Wi-Fi Functions • To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod and shooting position) and the magnified display area, with the camera set to [[] (= 38). press the

buttons or turn the 8 Setting Menu <7> dial to specify the general focal MF Indicator • You can also configure this setting by pressing the button, touching [e], position, and then press the button. 9 Accessories and then touching it again. zz To adjust the magnification, press the Appendix button. 10 zz Move the focusing frame as needed Index (= 83). 3 Fine-tune the focus. zz Press the shutter button halfway to have the camera fine-tune the focal position (Safety MF). 80 Cover Still Images • When you focus manually, the AF frame mode (= 82) is [1-point] Before Use and AF frame size (= 83) is [Normal], and these settings cannot Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode) Three consecutive images are captured each time you shoot, with the Common Camera be changed. Operations • Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom (= 36) or digital first one at the focal distance you set manually and the others at farther tele-converter (= 82), or when using a TV as a display (= 172), and nearer focal positions determined by presets. The distance from your Basic Guide but the magnified display will not appear. specified focus can be set in three levels. Advanced Guide • You can also adjust the focus by turning the ring (= 96). 1 Choose [ ]. • To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to stabilize it. 1 Camera Basics zz Press the button, choose • To hide or enlarge the magnified display area, press the button and [ ] in the menu, and then choose [ ] Auto Mode / adjust the [MF-Point Zoom] settings on the [4] tab as needed (= 25). 2 Hybrid Auto Mode (= 24). • To deactivate automatic focus fine-tuning when the shutter button is pressed Other Shooting halfway, press the button and set [Safety MF] on the [4] tab to [Off] 3 Modes (= 25). 4 P Mode Still Images Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking) 2 Configure the setting. Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing zz Press the < > button, and then adjust 6 Playback Mode easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge detection the setting by pressing the as needed. buttons or turning the <7> dial. 7 Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu 1 Access the setting screen. 8 zz Press the button, choose [MF 9 Accessories Peaking Settings] on the [4] tab, and • Focus bracketing is only available in [!] mode (= 88). then choose [On] (= 25). • Continuous shooting (= 79) is not available in this mode. 10 Appendix 2 Configure the setting. • You can also access the setting screen in step 2 by pressing the Index zz Choose a menu item to configure, and button in step 2 of “Shooting in Manual Focus Mode” (= 80). then choose the desired option (= 26). • Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in [$] (= 39). • In [Blink Detection] mode (= 50), this function is only available for the final • Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots. shot.

81 Cover Still Images Movies • To access the screen in step 2, you can either touch [ ] on the screen Before Use in step 1 or touch [ ] on the manual focus screen (= 80). Changing the AF Frame Mode • You can also configure this setting by touching or dragging the bar on the Common Camera Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode to suit the shooting conditions as Operations screen in step 2 to specify a value and then touching [ ]. follows. Basic Guide Still Images Movies zz Press the button, choose [AF Advanced Guide Digital Tele-Converter Frame] on the [4] tab, and then choose The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.5x or 2.0x. the desired option (= 25). 1 Camera Basics This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster than it Auto Mode / would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the same zoom 2 Hybrid Auto Mode factor. Other Shooting 3 Modes zz Press the button, choose 4 P Mode [Digital Zoom] on the [4] tab, and then Still Images Movies Tv, Av, M, and choose the desired option (= 25). 5 C Mode zz The view is enlarged and the zoom factor 1-point One AF frame is displayed. Effective for reliable focusing. is displayed on the screen. 6 Playback Mode • A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot focus 7 Wi-Fi Functions when you press the shutter button halfway. Note that AF-point zooming (= 49) is not possible. Setting Menu • The digital tele-converter cannot be used with digital zoom 8 (= 36) or AF-point zoom (= 49). • To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or in a corner, 9 Accessories first aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF frame, and then hold • The respective focal lengths when using [1.5x] and [2.0x] are 36.0 – 180.0 mm the shutter button halfway down. As you continue to hold the shutter button 10 Appendix and 48.0 – 240.0 mm (35mm film equivalent). halfway, recompose the shot as desired, and then press the shutter button all • The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom lever all the the way down (Focus Lock). Index way toward for maximum telephoto, and when you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following step 2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)” (= 36).

82 Cover Still Images • On the screen in step 1, you can also restore the AF frame to the original Before Use Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point) position by touching [ ], or exit the setting by touching [ ]. When you want to change the position or size of the AF frame, set the AF Common Camera Operations frame mode to [1-point]. Still Images Movies Basic Guide Face AiAF 1 Move the AF frame. • Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative Advanced Guide zz Touch the screen. An AF frame is metering only), and white balance ([ ] only). displayed in orange where you touched 1 Camera Basics (Touch AF). • After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed around the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main Auto Mode / zz You can turn the <7> dial to move the AF 2 subject, and up to two gray frames are displayed around other detected Hybrid Auto Mode frame and press the

faces. Other Shooting buttons to fine-tune the position. 3 Modes zz To return the AF frame to the original • When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving subjects, within a certain range. 4 P Mode position in the center, press the button. • After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are 5 Tv, Av, M, and displayed around faces in focus. C Mode 2 Resize the AF frame. Playback Mode zz 6 To reduce the AF frame size, turn the • If faces are not detected, or when only gray frames are displayed ring. Turn it again to restore it to the (without a white frame), up to nine green frames are displayed in the 7 Wi-Fi Functions original size. areas in focus when you press the shutter button halfway. 8 Setting Menu 3 Finish the setup process. • If faces are not detected when Servo AF (= 84) is set to [On], the AF frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you press zz Press the button. Accessories the shutter button halfway. 9 Examples of faces that cannot be detected: • Appendix • AF frames are displayed at normal size when you use the digital - Subjects that are distant or extremely close 10 zoom (= 36) or digital tele-converter (= 82), and in manual - Subjects that are dark or light focus mode (= 80). Index - Faces in profile, at an angle, or partly hidden • The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces. • You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame (= 72). No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you • You can also configure the AF frame size by pressing the button and • choosing [AF Frame Size] on the [4] tab. press the shutter button halfway.

83 Cover Still Images Still Images Changing the Focus Setting Before Use Shooting with Servo AF This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the Common Camera You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on Operations camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed. Instead, as you press the shutter button halfway. you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the shutter button Basic Guide halfway. Advanced Guide 1 Configure the setting. zz zz Press the button, choose Press the button, choose 1 Camera Basics [Servo AF] on the [4] tab, and then [Continuous AF] on the [4] tab, and then Auto Mode / choose [On] (= 25). choose [Off] (= 25). 2 Hybrid Auto Mode 2 Focus. Other Shooting 3 Modes zz The focus and exposure are maintained where the blue AF frame is displayed 4 P Mode while you are pressing the shutter button Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because the camera Tv, Av, M, and halfway. On 5 C Mode constantly focuses on subjects until you press the shutter button halfway. Off Conserves battery power, because the camera does not focus constantly. Playback Mode • Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions. 6 • In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames Wi-Fi Functions may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway. In this 7 case, the focus and exposure are set according to the specified AF 8 Setting Menu frame mode. • If adequate exposure cannot be obtained, shutter speeds and 9 Accessories aperture values are displayed in orange. Release the shutter button, and then press it halfway again. 10 Appendix • AF lock shooting is not available. • [AF-Point Zoom] on the [4] tab is not available. Index • Not available when using the self-timer (= 38).

84 Cover Still Images 4 Shoot. Before Use Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select) zz Press the shutter button halfway. After the camera focuses, [ ] changes to [ ]. Common Camera You can shoot after choosing a specific person’s face to focus on. Operations zz Press the shutter button all the way down Basic Guide 1 Prepare the camera for Face to shoot. Select. Advanced Guide zz Set the AF frame to [Face AiAF] (= 83). • When [Face ID] is set to [On], names of any registered people detected are 1 Camera Basics zz not displayed when you have selected another, unregistered face to focus on. Assign [ ] to the < > button (= 99). However, their names will be recorded in the still images (= 41). Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode 2 Enter Face Select mode. Other Shooting zz Aim the camera at the person’s face and 3 Modes press the < > button. P Mode zz After [Face Select : On] is displayed, a 4 face frame [ ] is displayed around the 5 Tv, Av, M, and face detected as the main subject. C Mode zz Even if the subject moves, the face frame 6 Playback Mode [ ] follows the subject within a certain range. 7 Wi-Fi Functions zz If a face is not detected, [ ] is not Setting Menu displayed. 8 3 Choose the face to focus on. 9 Accessories zz To switch the face frame [ ] to another Appendix detected face, press the < > button. 10 zz After you have switched the face frame Index to all detected faces, [Face Select : Off] is displayed, and the specified AF frame mode screen is displayed again.

85 Cover Still Images Movies Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF) • If you prefer the camera not to shoot when you touch the screen, Before Use make sure [Touch Shutter] mode is deactivated. Press the Common Camera You can shoot after choosing a person’s face or another subject to focus on. button, choose [Touch Shutter] on the [4] tab, and then choose Operations [Off] (= 25). Basic Guide 1 Set the AF frame to [Face AiAF] • Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or move = too rapidly, or when there is inadequate contrast between subjects ( 83). and the background. Advanced Guide 2 Choose a person’s face or • Even if you are shooting in [e] mode (= 80), the camera will another subject to focus on. revert to [ ] mode if you touch the screen to specify where to 1 Camera Basics zz Touch the subject or person on the focus. 2 Auto Mode / screen. • If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not display when registered Hybrid Auto Mode people are detected, but the names will be recorded in the still Other Shooting 3 Modes zz When the subject is detected, the camera images (= 41). However, a name will display if the subject chosen to focus on is the same as a person detected with Face ID. beeps and [ ] is displayed. Focus is 4 P Mode maintained even if the subject moves. Tv, Av, M, and zz To cancel Touch AF, touch [^]. 5 C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 3 Shoot. 8 Setting Menu zz Press the shutter button halfway. After the camera focuses, [ ] changes to a 9 Accessories green [ ]. Appendix zz Press the shutter button all the way down 10 to shoot. Index

86 Cover Still Images Movies Flash Shooting with the AF Lock Before Use Still Images Common Camera The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will not Operations change even when you release your finger from the shutter button. Changing the Flash Mode Basic Guide You can change the flash mode to match the shooting scene. For details on 1 Lock the focus. the flash range, see “Flash Range” (= 206). Advanced Guide zz With the shutter button pressed halfway, press the button. 1 Raise the flash. 1 Camera Basics zz Move the switch. Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz The focus is now locked, and [f] and 2 Configure the setting. Other Shooting the MF indicator are displayed. zz Press the button, choose a flash 3 Modes zz mode (either press the buttons To unlock the focus, hold the shutter 4 P Mode button halfway down and press the or turn the <7> dial), and then press the button again. button. 5 Tv, Av, M, and zz C Mode 2 The option you configured is now Compose the shot and shoot. displayed. 6 Playback Mode

Cannot be used with Touch Shutter (= 39). Wi-Fi Functions • • The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the button 7 when the flash is lowered. Move the switch to raise the flash, Setting Menu then configure the setting. 8 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

87 Cover Still Images [ ] Auto Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation Before Use Fires automatically in low-light conditions. Common Camera Just as with regular exposure compensation (= 70), you can adjust the Operations flash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments. [h] On Basic Guide Fires for each shot. zz Raise the flash, press the button and Advanced Guide [Z] Slow Synchro immediately turn the ring to choose Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a the compensation level, and then press 1 Camera Basics the button. slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of flash range. Auto Mode / zz The correction level you specified is now 2 Hybrid Auto Mode • In [Z] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures displayed. Other Shooting to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should 3 Modes set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure P Mode the camera (= 91). • When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically adjusts the 4 shutter speed or aperture value during the flash shots to reduce washed- • In [Z] mode, even after the flash fires, ensure that the main subject Tv, Av, M, and out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure. However, you can deactivate does not move until the shutter sound is finished playing. 5 C Mode automatic adjustment of the shutter speed and aperture value by accessing MENU (= 25) and choosing [4] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Safety FE] ► 6 Playback Mode [!] Off [Off]. For shooting without the flash. • You can also configure the flash exposure compensation by accessing MENU 7 Wi-Fi Functions (= 25) and choosing [4] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Flash Exp. Comp]. • If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter button • You can also access the [Flash Settings] MENU screen (= 25) when the 8 Setting Menu halfway in low-light conditions, mount the camera on a tripod or take flash is up by pressing the button and immediately pressing the Accessories other measures to keep it still. button. 9

You can also access the [Flash Settings] MENU screen (= 25) by pressing Appendix • Adjustment is also possible by pressing the button, touching the desired • 10 the button and touching [ ]. option, and then touching it again. Index

88 Cover Still Images Still Images Shooting with the FE Lock Changing the Flash Timing Before Use Common Camera Just as with the AE lock (= 71), you can lock the exposure for the flash Change the timing of the flash and shutter release as follows. Operations shots. Basic Guide 1 Access the setting screen. 1 Raise the flash and set it to [h] zz Press the button, choose [Flash Advanced Guide (= 87). Settings] on the [4] tab, and then press 2 Lock the flash exposure. the button (= 25). 1 Camera Basics zz Aim the camera at the subject to shoot 2 Configure the setting. Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode with the exposure locked. With the zz Choose [Shutter Sync.], and then choose shutter button pressed halfway, press the Other Shooting the desired option (= 26). 3 Modes button. 1st-curtain The flash fires immediately after the shutter opens. 4 P Mode zz The flash fires, and when 2nd-curtain The flash fires immediately before the shutter closes. [ ] is displayed, the flash output level is Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode retained. zz To unlock FE, release the shutter button 6 Playback Mode and press the button again. In this Wi-Fi Functions case, [ ] is no longer displayed. 7 3 Compose the shot and shoot. 8 Setting Menu zz After one shot, FE is unlocked and [ ] is Accessories no longer displayed. 9 10 Appendix • FE Lock cannot be used with Touch Shutter (= 39) or Touch AF (= 86), because touching the screen will cancel FE Lock. Index

• FE: Flash Exposure

89 Cover Still Images • When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images Before Use Shooting RAW Images recorded together) to a computer, always use the dedicated Common Camera RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially no software (= 173). Operations loss of image quality from the camera’s internal image processing. Use • Digital zoom (= 36), date stamps (= 40), and red-eye Digital Photo Professional (= 173) to adjust RAW images as desired with reduction (= 47) are set to [Off] in [ ] and [ ] modes. Basic Guide minimal loss of image quality. Additionally, noise reduction level (= 73), i-Contrast (= 74) and My Colors (= 78) cannot be configured. Advanced Guide

zz Press the button, choose [ ] in Camera Basics • The file extension for JPEG images is .JPG, and the extension for 1 the menu, and choose the desired option RAW images is .CR2. Auto Mode / (= 24). 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting 3 Modes 4 P Mode

Records JPEG images. JPEG images are processed in the camera for optimal Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode image quality and compressed to reduce file size. However, the compression process is irreversible, and images cannot be restored to their original, 6 Playback Mode unprocessed state. Image processing may also cause some loss of image quality. 7 Wi-Fi Functions Records RAW images. RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially no loss of image quality from the camera’s image processing. The 8 Setting Menu data cannot be used in this state for viewing on a computer or printing. You must first use the software (Digital Photo Professional) to convert images to ordinary Accessories JPEG or TIFF files. Images can be adjusted with minimal loss of image quality. 9 For details on resolution and the number of shots that will fit on a card, see Appendix “Number of 4:3 Shots per Memory Card” (= 205). 10 Records two images, both a RAW image and a JPEG image, for each shot. Index The JPEG image can be viewed on a computer or printed without using the software.

90 Cover Other Settings Still Images Movies Changing the IS Mode Settings Before Use Still Images Common Camera Changing the Compression Ratio 1 Access the setting screen. Operations (Image Quality) zz Press the button, choose [IS Basic Guide Settings] on the [4] tab, and then press Choose from two compression ratios, [ ] (Super Fine) and [ ] (Fine), as the button (= 25). Advanced Guide follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each compression ratio can fit on a memory card, see “Number of 4:3 Shots per Memory Card” (= 205). 2 Configure the setting. 1 Camera Basics zz Press the

buttons or turn the Auto Mode / <7> dial to choose [IS Mode]. Press the zz Press the button, choose [ ] in 2 Hybrid Auto Mode buttons to choose the desired the menu, and choose the desired option Other Shooting option (= 26). 3 Modes (= 24). Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically Continuous 4 P Mode applied (Intelligent IS) (= 35). Tv, Av, M, and Shoot Only* Image stabilization is active only at the moment of shooting. 5 C Mode Off Deactivates image stabilization. 6 Playback Mode * The setting is changed to [Continuous] for movie recording. 7 Wi-Fi Functions • If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this 8 Setting Menu case, set [IS Mode] to [Off]. 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

91 Cover Still Images Movies Movies Switching the Color of Shooting-Screen Before Use Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown Information Common Camera Operations before Shooting Information displayed on the shooting screen and menus can be changed to Basic Guide During movie recording, a smaller image display area is shown, with the a color suitable for shooting under low-light conditions. Enabling this setting subject enlarged, as a measure when correcting other distortion such as is useful in modes such as [ ] (= 64). rotational camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before Advanced Guide shooting, you can disable this image stabilization. zz Press the button, choose [Night 1 Camera Basics Display] on the [4] tab, and then choose zz Follow the steps in “Changing the IS Auto Mode / [On] (= 25). 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Mode Settings” (= 91) to access the [IS Settings] screen. Other Shooting 3 Modes zz Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose [2] (= 35). 4 P Mode Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode • The color is not adjusted in Playback mode. Playback Mode • You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded at 6 the same size shown before shooting. 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

92 Cover

Before Use

Common Camera Operations 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode Basic Guide Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and customize the camera for your shooting style Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting 3 Modes • Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the respective mode. 4 P Mode Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)...... 94 Customization for Shooting Styles...... 96 Customizing the FUNC. Menu 8 Setting Menu Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)...... 94 Changing Control Ring Settings...... 96 (FUNC. Menu Layout)...... 100 Using the Control Ring for Adjustment...... 98 Choosing Items to Include in the Menu...... 100 9 Accessories Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values Customizing Display Information...... 98 Saving Shooting Settings...... 101 ([M] Mode)...... 95 Convenient Control Using the < > or Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items Appendix Adjusting the Flash Output...... 96 Movie Button...... 99 (My Menu)...... 102 10 Index

93 Cover Still Images Still Images Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode) Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode) Before Use Common Camera Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera Operations automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed. automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value. For details on available shutter speeds, see “Shutter Speed” (= 207). For details on available aperture values, see “Aperture” (= 207). Basic Guide 1 Enter [M] mode. 1 Enter [B] mode. Advanced Guide zz Set the mode dial to [ ]. M zz Set the mode dial to [B]. 2 Set the shutter speed. 1 Camera Basics zz Turn the ring to set the shutter speed. 2 Set the aperture value. Auto Mode / zz Turn the ring to set the aperture 2 Hybrid Auto Mode value. Other Shooting 3 Modes 4 P Mode Tv, Av, M, and Shutter Speed (sec.) Available ISO Speed (= 72) 5 C Mode 15 – 1.3 [ ] [ ] – [ ] , • Orange display of shutter speeds when you press the shutter button 6 Playback Mode 1 – 1/2500 [ ], [ ] – [ ] halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard exposure. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is displayed in 7 Wi-Fi Functions white, or use safety shift (see below). • With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, there will be a delay before you can shoot again, as images are processed to remove noise. 8 Setting Menu • When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set [IS • [B]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the iris in the lens) Mode] to [Off] (= 91). • To avoid exposure problems in [M] and [B] modes, you can have the 9 Accessories • The speed you set may be lowered automatically as needed if the camera automatically adjust the shutter speed or aperture value, even when flash fires. standard exposure cannot otherwise be obtained. Press the button 10 Appendix • Orange display of aperture values when you press the shutter and set [Safety Shift] on the [4] tab to [On] (= 25). button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard However, safety shift is disabled when the flash fires. Index exposure. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is • You can customize camera operation so that turning the <7> dial changes the displayed in white, or use safety shift (= 94). aperture value (= 96). • Images shot at high ISO speeds may look grainy.

• [M]: Time value • You can customize camera operation so that turning the <7> dial changes the shutter speed (= 96). 94 Cover Still Images Before Use Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture • After you set the shutter speed or aperture value, the exposure level Values ([M] Mode) may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot. Common Camera • Screen brightness may change depending on your specified shutter Operations Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed and speed or aperture value. However, screen brightness remains the Basic Guide aperture value to obtain the desired exposure. same when the flash is up and the mode is set to [h]. For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see “Shutter • To have the setting you did not configure in step 2 (whether shutter Advanced Guide Speed” (= 207) and “Aperture” (= 207). speed or aperture value) automatically adjusted to obtain standard exposure, hold the shutter button halfway and press the 1 Camera Basics 1 Enter [D] mode. button. Note that standard exposure may not be possible with some zz Auto Mode / Set the mode dial to [D]. settings. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode • Images shot at high ISO speeds may look grainy. 2 Configure the setting. Other Shooting 3 Modes zz Turn the <7> dial to set the shutter • [D]: Manual speed, and turn the ring to set the • Calculation of standard exposure is based on the specified metering method 4 P Mode aperture value. (= 71). Tv, Av, M, and zz An exposure level mark based on your • You can customize camera operation so that turning the ring adjusts the 5 C Mode shutter speed and turning the <7> dial adjusts the aperture value (= 96). specified value is shown on the exposure Playback Mode level indicator for comparison to the 6 Aperture Value standard exposure level. 7 Wi-Fi Functions Shutter Speed zz The exposure level mark is shown in orange when the difference from standard 8 Setting Menu Standard exposure exceeds 2 stops. Exposure Level 9 Accessories Exposure Level Indicator 10 Appendix Exposure Level Mark Index

Shutter Speed (sec.) Available ISO Speed (= 72) 250 – 40 [ ] 30 – 1.3 [ ] – [ ] 1 – 1/2500 [ ] – [ ] 95 Cover Still Images Customization for Shooting Styles Adjusting the Flash Output Before Use Still Images Movies Common Camera Choose from the three flash levels in [D] mode. Changing Control Ring Settings Operations Basic Guide 1 Raise the flash. Reassign control ring functions as follows. Using the control ring is an zz Move the switch. enjoyable way to control the camera as you would a fully manual camera. Advanced Guide 2 Enter [D] mode. 1 Camera Basics zz Set the mode dial to [D]. Choose a function to assign to 1 the ring. Auto Mode / zz 2 Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Configure the setting. Press the < > button. Other Shooting zz Press the button and immediately 3 Modes turn the ring to choose the flash zz Choose an option, either by pressing the P Mode level, and then press the button. 4 < > or buttons or by turning zz Once the setting is complete, the flash Tv, Av, M, and the ring or <7> dial. 5 output level is displayed. C Mode zz Press the button to complete the [ ]: low, [ ]: medium, [ ]: high Playback Mode setting. 6 • You can also set the flash level by accessing MENU (= 25) and choosing 7 Wi-Fi Functions [4] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Flash Output]. Setting Menu • You can set the flash level in [M] or [B] mode by accessing MENU 2 Configure the assigned 8 (= 25) and choosing [4] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Flash Mode] ► function. [Manual]. 9 Accessories • You can also access the [Flash Settings] MENU screen by pressing the zz Turn the ring or the <7> dial to button and then the button. configure the assigned function. 10 Appendix

Index • You can also access the [Flash Settings] MENU screen by pressing the You can also configure this setting by pressing the < > button, touching an button and touching [ ]. • option to choose it, and then touching it again.

96 Cover

Functions Assignable to the Control Ring • Icons labeled with [ ] indicate that the function is not available in the current Before Use Functions you can assign to the control ring vary depending on shooting shooting mode or under current function conditions. • The ring can be used for step zooming in [ ], [K], or movie mode Common Camera mode, and those assignments determine which functions you can assign to Operations the control dial. (= 37). Basic Guide Shooting Still Images Movies Mode D B M G Advanced Guide Assignable Function Assigning Functions to the Control Ring Assign functions to the control ring based on each shooting mode. Camera Basics y Av Av Tv ISO 1 7 Tv – – – Auto Mode / 1 Choose [ ]. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode y ISO ISO ISO ISO zz Following step 1 in “Changing Control Other Shooting 7 Tv, Av* Av Tv – Ring Settings” (= 96), choose [ ] 3 Modes and press the button. y Tv +/– +/– +/– P Mode b 4 7 Av Av Tv – 2 Configure the setting. Tv, Av, M, and f y Manual focusing is possible (= 80). zz Press the buttons or turn the 5 C Mode y White balance can be corrected (= 76). <7> dial to choose the shooting mode Playback Mode with functions to assign. 6 y Step zooming is possible (= 37). zz Press the

buttons or turn the 7 Wi-Fi Functions y Dynamic range correction can be configured (= 75). ring to choose a function to assign to Shadow correction can be enabled or disabled ( 75). the control ring. Setting Menu y = Functions You Can Assign to 8 the Control Ring zz Functions you can assign to the control y The aspect ratio can be changed (= 46). Accessories dial will be updated automatically. 9 – Functions can be assigned as desired (= 97). zz Press the button to return to the 10 Appendix • +/–: exposure compensation (= 70); ISO: ISO speed (= 72); MF: manual focus shooting screen. (= 80); Tv: shutter speed (= 94); Av: aperture value (= 94). Index • When you assign [f], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ], to the < > button, the • You can also access the setting screen by choosing [ ] and touching [ ] functions you can assign to the <7> dial are the same as for [ ]. in step 1 of “Changing Control Ring Settings” (= 96). * Tv and Av settings can be toggled by pressing the button. • On the setting screen, you can also configure the functions assigned to the control ring by touching the functions and then [ ].

97 Cover Still Images Still Images Movies Using the Control Ring for Adjustment Customizing Display Information Before Use Common Camera You can turn the control ring for instant adjustment of ISO speed, exposure Set the number of custom displays (= 24) and what information is Operations compensation, shutter speed, and aperture value, as you touch the screen displayed in each display when the

button is pressed in shooting to switch between these items. screen. Basic Guide

Advanced Guide zz Touch the right edge (outlined at left) to 1 Access the setting screen. view menu items, drag up or down to zz Press the button, choose 1 Camera Basics choose an item, and turn the ring to [Custom Display] on the [4] tab, and Auto Mode / specify a value. then press the button (= 25). 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting 3 Modes

P Mode 2 Configure the setting. 4 zz Press the

buttons or Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode turn the <7> dial to choose an item, and then press the button. Items you 6 Playback Mode choose for display are labeled with [ ]. zz Selected items (labeled with a [ ]) will 7 Wi-Fi Functions be included in display. 8 Setting Menu Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Note that the functions Shooting Info Displays shooting information (= 191). Accessories assigned to the control ring (= 96) are not displayed. Grid Lines Displays a reference grid. 9 Electronic D B M G Displays the electronic level (= 49). Appendix Level 10 ISO ISO ISO ISO Tv +/– +/– +/– Histogram Displays a histogram (= 106) in [G], [M], [B], and [D] modes. Index Av Av Tv

• +/–: exposure compensation (= 70); ISO: ISO speed (= 72); Tv: shutter speed (= 94); Av: aperture value (= 94).

98 Cover 3 Use the assigned function as • Settings will not be saved if you press the shutter button halfway needed. Before Use and return to the shooting screen from the custom display settings zz To activate an assigned function, press screen. Common Camera the button you assigned it to. Operations • Grayed-out items can also be specified, but they may not be displayed in some shooting modes. Basic Guide • To restore default settings, choose [ ] in [Set button] or [ ] in [Set button]. • Grid lines are not recorded in your shots. Advanced Guide • Icons labeled with [ ] indicate that the function is not available in the current shooting mode or under current function conditions. Camera Basics • With [ ], you can move and resize the AF frame by pressing the < > 1 • You can also choose an item to display by touching it. button in [1-point] AF frame mode (= 83). Auto Mode / • With [ ] or [ ], each press of the assigned button records white balance data 2 Hybrid Auto Mode (= 76), and the white balance setting changes to [ ] or [ ]. Other Shooting Still Images Movies • With [%], each press of the assigned button adjusts and locks the focus. [%] 3 Modes Convenient Control Using the < > or Movie is then displayed. P Mode • With [ ], pressing the assigned button deactivates screen display. 4 Button - Press any button (other than the power button) Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode You can quickly and easily activate functions that you assign to the < > or - Hold the camera in another orientation movie button. - Raise or lower the flash 6 Playback Mode • You can still record movies in [ ], [E] or [ ] mode even if you assign a function to the movie button. 7 Wi-Fi Functions 1 Access the setting screen. zz Press the button, choose • You can also configure settings by touching a desired option and then touching 8 Setting Menu [Set button] or [Set button] on the it again or touching [ ]. [4] tab, and then press the button 9 Accessories (= 25). 10 Appendix 2 Configure the setting. Index zz Press the

buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose a function to assign, and then press the button.

99 Cover Customizing the FUNC. Menu 3 Configure the setting. zz Before Use (FUNC. Menu Layout) Press the button, choose [OK] (either press the buttons or turn Common Camera The display of FUNC. menu items can be customized. Functions not shown the <7> dial), and then press the Operations on this menu will be available on the [4] tab of the menu screen. button. Basic Guide

Still Images Movies • The screen in step 2 can also be accessed by holding down the button Advanced Guide Choosing Items to Include in the Menu when the FUNC. menu is displayed. • Items removed from the FUNC. menu can be added to My Menu (= 102); 1 Camera Basics adding them to the FUNC. menu again automatically removes them from My 1 Auto Mode / Access the setting screen. Menu. 2 zz Press the button, choose Hybrid Auto Mode [FUNC. Menu Layout] on the [4] Other Shooting Rearranging Menu Items 3 Modes tab, and then press the button (= 25). 1 Access the setting screen. 4 P Mode zz On the screen in step 2 of “Choosing Tv, Av, M, and Items to Include in the Menu” (= 100), 5 C Mode press the < > button. Playback Mode 2 Choose icons to include in the zz Press the or button to choose 6 menu. an icon to move. Press the

7 Wi-Fi Functions zz Press the

buttons buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose or turn the <7> dial and then press the the new position, and then press the 8 Setting Menu button to choose icons to include or button. in the FUNC. menu. Selected icons are 9 Accessories 2 Configure the setting. marked with a [ ]. zz Press the button, choose [OK] Appendix zz Selected items (labeled with a [ ]) will be 10 (either press the buttons or turn included in display. the <7> dial), and then press the Index zz Items without a [ ] will be available on button. the [4] tab of the menu screen.

100 Cover Still Images 3 Save the settings. Before Use Saving Shooting Settings zz Press the buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose [OK], and then press Common Camera Save commonly used shooting modes and your configured function settings Operations for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode dial to [ ]. the button. Even settings that are usually cleared when you switch shooting modes or Basic Guide turn the camera off (such as self-timer settings) can be retained this way. Advanced Guide Settings that can be saved • To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose [ ], 1 Camera Basics • Shooting modes ([G], [M], [B], and [D]) change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These setting Auto Mode / • Items set in [G], [M], [B], or [D] modes (= 70 – 96) details are not applied in other shooting modes. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode • Shooting menu settings Other Shooting • To clear information you have saved to [ ] and restore default values, turn the 3 Modes • Zoom positions mode dial to [ ] and choose [Reset All] (= 165). P Mode • Manual focus positions (= 80) 4 Tv, Av, M, and • My Menu settings (= 102) 5 C Mode

Playback Mode 1 Enter a shooting mode with 6 settings you want to save, and 7 Wi-Fi Functions change the settings as desired. Setting Menu 2 Configure the setting. 8 zz Press the button, choose [Save 9 Accessories Settings] on the [4] tab, and then press the button. 10 Appendix

Index

101 Cover Still Images Movies 3 Rearrange menu items, as Before Use Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items needed. (My Menu) zz Press the

buttons or turn the Common Camera Operations <7> dial to choose [Sort], and then press You can save up to five commonly used shooting menu items on the [ ] the button. Basic Guide tab. By customizing the [ ] tab, you can access to these items quickly from a single screen. zz Choose a menu item to move (either press the

buttons or turn the Advanced Guide <7> dial), and then press the 1 Camera Basics Access the setting screen. button. 1 zz Press the button, choose [My zz Press the

buttons or turn the Auto Mode / Menu settings] on the [ ] tab, and then 2 Hybrid Auto Mode <7> dial to change the order, and then press the button (= 25). Other Shooting press the button. 3 Modes zz Press the button. 4 P Mode • Grayed-out items in step 2 can also be specified, but they may not Tv, Av, M, and 2 Configure the setting. be available in some shooting modes. 5 C Mode zz Press the

buttons or turn the 6 Playback Mode <7> dial to choose [Select items], and • To make My Menu immediately accessible by pressing the button in then press the button. Shooting mode, choose [Set default view] and press the buttons to 7 Wi-Fi Functions zz Choose up to five menu items to save choose [Yes]. (either press the

buttons or 8 Setting Menu • On the [Select items] screen for saving or clearing items, you can also touch turn the <7> dial), and then press the items to select them. 9 Accessories button. • On the [Sort] screen, you can also drag items to change the display order. zz [ ] is displayed. 10 Appendix zz To cancel saving, press the button. [ ] is no longer displayed. Index zz Press the button.

102 Cover

Before Use

Common Camera Operations 6 Playback Mode Basic Guide Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit them in many ways Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics • To prepare the camera for these operations, press the <1> button to enter Playback mode. Auto Mode / • It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from 2 Hybrid Auto Mode other cameras. Other Shooting 3 Modes 4 P Mode Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode Viewing...... 104 Viewing Slideshows...... 114 Convenient Control: Touch Actions...... 122 Switching Display Modes...... 106 Auto Playback of Related Images Using a Function Assigned to [ ]...... 122 6 Playback Mode Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting (Smart Shuffle)...... 115 Changing Touch Actions Functions...... 123 Still Images (Digest Movies)...... 107 Protecting Images...... 116 Editing Still Images...... 124 7 Wi-Fi Functions Checking People Detected in Face ID...... 108 Choosing a Selection Method...... 116 Resizing Images...... 124 Browsing and Filtering Images...... 108 Choosing Images Individually...... 116 Cropping...... 125 8 Setting Menu Navigating through Images in an Index...... 108 Selecting a Range...... 117 Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)...... 125 Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions...109 Specifying All Images at Once...... 118 Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)...... 126 9 Accessories Using the Control Ring to Jump...... 111 Erasing Images...... 118 Correcting Red-Eye...... 127 Viewing Individual Images in a Group...... 111 Erasing Multiple Images at Once...... 119 Editing Movies...... 128 10 Appendix Editing Face ID Information...... 112 Rotating Images...... 120 Reducing File Sizes...... 129 Image Viewing Options...... 113 Deactivating Auto Rotation...... 121 Editing Digest Movies...... 129 Index Magnifying Images...... 113 Tagging Images as Favorites...... 121

103 Cover Still Images Movies zz Movies are identified by a [ ] icon. To Before Use Viewing play movies, go to step 3. Common Camera After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as Operations follows. Basic Guide

1 Enter Playback mode. Advanced Guide zz Press the <1> button. zz Your last shot is displayed. 3 Play movies. 1 Camera Basics zz To start playback, press the button Auto Mode / to access the movie control panel, 2 Hybrid Auto Mode 2 choose [ ] (either press the Other Shooting Browse through your images. 3 Modes zz To view the previous image, press buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then the button or turn the <7> dial press the button again. 4 P Mode counterclockwise. To view the next Tv, Av, M, and image, press the button or turn the 5 C Mode 4 Adjust the volume. <7> dial clockwise. zz Press the

buttons to adjust the 6 Playback Mode zz Press and hold the buttons to volume. browse through images quickly. Images Wi-Fi Functions zz To adjust the volume when the volume 7 appear grainy at this time. indicator is no longer displayed, press the 8 Setting Menu

buttons. Accessories Volume Indicator 5 Pause playback. 9 zz To access Scroll Display mode, turn the zz To pause or resume playback, press the 10 Appendix <7> dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the button. <7> dial to browse through images. zz After the movie is finished, [ ] is Index zz To return to single-image display, press displayed. the button. zz To browse images grouped by shooting date, press the

buttons in Scroll Display mode. 104 Cover zz To start playback, touch [ ] in step 3 of • To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button Before Use halfway. “Viewing” (= 104). • To deactivate Scroll Display, press the button, choose [Scroll zz To adjust the volume during movie Common Camera Operations Display] on the [1] tab, and then choose [Off]. playback, quickly drag up or down across • If you prefer to have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback the screen. Basic Guide mode, press the button, and on the [1] tab, choose [Resume] and zz To stop playback, touch the screen. The then [Last shot]. screen shown at left is displayed, and the Advanced Guide • To change the transition shown between images, press the button, following operations are available. choose [Transition Effect] on the [1] tab, and then choose the desired effect. Camera Basics zz Touch [ ] to display the volume 1 panel, and then touch [o][p] to adjust Auto Mode / Touch-Screen Operations 2 Hybrid Auto Mode the volume. At a volume of 0, [ ] is Other Shooting zz To view the next image, drag left across displayed. 3 Modes the screen, and to view the previous zz To switch frames, touch the scrollbar or P Mode image, drag right. drag left or right. 4 zz To resume playback, touch [ ]. Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode zz Touch [^] to return to the screen in step 2 of “Viewing” (= 104). 6 Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions zz To access Scroll Display mode, quickly 7 drag left or right repeatedly. 8 Setting Menu zz You can also choose images in Scroll Display mode by dragging left or right. 9 Accessories zz Touching the central image will restore Appendix single-image display. 10 zz To browse images grouped by shooting Index date in Scroll Display mode, drag up or down.

105 Cover Still Images Movies Switching Display Modes Still Images Movies Before Use Histogram Common Camera Press the

button to view other information on the screen, or to hide Operations the information. For details on the information displayed, see “Playback High (Detailed Information Display)” (= 192). zz The graph in detailed information display Basic Guide (= 106) is a histogram showing the distribution of brightness in the image. Advanced Guide Low The horizontal axis represents the degree Camera Basics Dark Bright of brightness, and the vertical axis, how 1 much of the image is at each level of Auto Mode / No Information Simple Detailed RGB Histogram, brightness. Viewing the histogram is a 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Display Information Information GPS Information way to check exposure. Other Shooting Display Display Display 3 Modes zz The histogram can also be accessed while shooting (= 98, 191). 4 P Mode Tv, Av, M, and Still Images Movies 5 C Mode Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights) 6 Playback Mode Washed-out highlights in the image flash on the screen in detailed information display (= 106). 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

106 Cover Movies Still Images Movies Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Before Use RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display Still Images (Digest Movies) Common Camera Operations zz The RGB histogram shows the View digest movies recorded automatically in [ ] mode (= 32) on a day Basic Guide distribution of shades of red, green, and of still image shooting as follows. blue in an image. The horizontal axis Advanced Guide represents R, G, or B brightness, and the 1 Choose an image. vertical axis, how much of the image is zz Choose a still image labeled with [ ] 1 Camera Basics at that level of brightness. Viewing this and press the button. Auto Mode / histogram enables you to check image 2 Hybrid Auto Mode color characteristics. Other Shooting 3 Modes zz Using a smartphone connected to the camera via Wi-Fi, you can geotag images 4 P Mode on the camera, adding information such 2 Play the movie. Tv, Av, M, and as latitude, longitude, and elevation zz Press the buttons or turn the 5 C Mode (= 153). You can review this information <7> dial to choose [OK]. 6 Playback Mode in the GPS information display. zz The movie recorded automatically on the zz Latitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC day of still image shooting is played back, 7 Wi-Fi Functions (shooting date and time) are listed from from the beginning. top to bottom. 8 Setting Menu

• After a moment, [ ] will no longer be displayed when you are using the Accessories • [---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available on 9 camera with information display deactivated (= 106). your smartphone or items not recorded correctly. 10 Appendix • You can also play digest movies by touching [ ] on the screen in step 1 • UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as Greenwich Mean and touching [OK] on the screen in step 2. Index Time • GPS information display is not available for images that lack this information.

• You can also switch between the RGB histogram (still images only) and GPS information display by dragging the lower half of the screen upward or downward in detailed information display. 107 Cover Browsing and Filtering Images Viewing by Date Before Use Digest movies can be viewed by date. Still Images Movies Common Camera Navigating through Images in an Index Operations 1 Choose a movie. Basic Guide zz Press the button, choose [List/ By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly find the images Play Digest Movies] on the [1] tab, and you are looking for. Advanced Guide then choose a date (= 25). 2 Play the movie. 1 Display images in an index. 1 Camera Basics zz Press the button to start playback. zz Move the zoom lever toward to Auto Mode / display images in an index. Moving the 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Still Images lever again will increase the number of Other Shooting 3 Modes Checking People Detected in Face ID images shown. zz To display fewer images, move the zoom 4 P Mode If you switch the camera to simple information display mode (= 106), the lever toward . Fewer images are Tv, Av, M, and names of up to five detected people registered in Face ID (= 41) will be shown each time you move the lever. 5 C Mode displayed. 2 Choose an image. 6 Playback Mode zz zz Turn the <7> dial to scroll through the Press the

button several times until Wi-Fi Functions simple information display is activated, images. 7 zz Press the

buttons to and then press the buttons or 8 Setting Menu turn the <7> dial to choose an image. choose an image. zz Names will be displayed on detected zz An orange frame is displayed around the 9 Accessories people. selected image. zz Press the button to view the 10 Appendix selected image in single-image display. • If you do not want names to display on images shot using Face ID, press the Index button, choose [Face ID Info] on the [1] tab, and then set [Name • To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the

Display] to [Off]. buttons or turn the <7> dial rapidly), press the button, and on the [1] tab, set [Index Effect] to [Off].

108 Cover

Touch-Screen Operations Still Images Movies Before Use zz Pinch in to switch from single-image Filtering Display by [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] Common Camera display to index display. Operations 1 Choose [Image Search]. zz To view more thumbnails per screen, Basic Guide zz Press the button, and then pinch in again. choose [Image Search] on the [1] tab zz Drag up or down on the screen to scroll Advanced Guide (= 25). through displayed images. 1 Camera Basics zz To view fewer thumbnails per screen, Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode spread your fingers apart. Other Shooting zz Touch an image to choose it, and touch it 2 Choose the first condition for 3 Modes again to view it in single-image display. image display or navigation. P Mode zz Press the

buttons to choose a 4 display filter. Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode zz When [ ] or [ ] is selected, you can Still Images Movies view only images matching this condition 6 Playback Mode Finding Images Matching Specified by pressing the buttons or turning the <7> dial. To perform an 7 Wi-Fi Functions Conditions action for all of these images together, 8 Setting Menu Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by filtering press the button and go to step 4. image display according to your specified conditions. You can also protect 3 Choose the second condition 9 Accessories (= 116) or delete (= 118) these images all at once. and check the images found. Appendix Favorites Displays images tagged as favorites (= 121). zz Press the buttons to choose 10 Shot Date Displays the images shot on a specific date. another condition. Once you turn the Index <7> dial, you can view the images People Displays images with detected faces. narrowed down by your conditions. Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in Still image/Movie zz To cancel this mode, press the [ ] mode (= 32). button. Name Displays images of a registered person (= 41). zz To switch to filtered image display, press the button and go to step 4. 109 Cover 4 View the filtered images. Still Images Before Use zz Press the buttons or turn the <7> dial to browse the images narrowed Filtering Display by [ ] Common Camera Operations down by your conditions. 1 Choose [ ]. zz To exit filtered image display, press the Basic Guide zz Following steps 1 – 2 in “Filtering Display button, and after [Image search by [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ]” (= 109), canceled] is displayed, press the Advanced Guide choose [ ] and press the button. button. Camera Basics 2 Choose a person. 1 • When the camera has found no corresponding images for some zz Press the

buttons Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode conditions, those conditions will not be available. to choose a person, and then press the Other Shooting button. 3 Modes • To show or hide information, press the

button in step 4. • Options for viewing the images found (in step 4) include “Navigating through 4 P Mode Images in an Index” (= 108), “Magnifying Images” (= 113), and “Viewing Tv, Av, M, and Slideshows” (= 114). You can protect, erase, or print all images found or add 3 View the filtered images. 5 C Mode them to a photobook by choosing [Select All Images in Search] in “Protecting zz Follow step 4 in “Filtering Display by [ ], Images” (= 116), “Erasing Multiple Images at Once” (= 119), “Adding [ ], [ ], or [ ]” (= 110) to view the 6 Playback Mode Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (= 180), or “Adding Images to a Photobook” images. (= 182). 7 Wi-Fi Functions • If you edit images and save them as new images (= 124 – 127), a message is displayed, and the images that were found are no longer shown. • [ ] is not available unless people are registered (= 41). 8 Setting Menu

• You can also choose conditions by touching the screens in steps 2 and 3. 9 Accessories • After choosing conditions, you can view images matching your conditions by • You can also view images that include a specific person by touching the touching a condition again. person in step 2 and then touching the person again. 10 Appendix

Index

110 Cover Still Images Movies Touch-Screen Operations Using the Control Ring to Jump Before Use zz You can also jump to the previous or next Common Camera Use the control ring to find and jump between desired images quickly by image according to your jump method Operations filtering image display according to your specified conditions. chosen in step 1 of “Using the Control Basic Guide Jump to Favorites Displays images tagged as favorites (= 121). Ring to Jump” (= 111) by dragging left Jumps to the first image in each group of images that or right with two fingers. Advanced Guide Jump Shot Date were shot on the same date. Jump 10 Images Jumps by 10 images at a time. 1 Camera Basics Still Images Jump 100 Images Jumps by 100 images at a time. Auto Mode / Viewing Individual Images in a Group 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting 1 Choose a condition. Grouped images (either from continuous shooting (= 79) in [G], [M], 3 Modes zz Choose a condition (or jump method) in [B], or [D] mode (= 69, 94, or 95) or individual still images saved P Mode single-image display by turning the as source data in [ ] mode (= 65)) are generally displayed together, 4 ring and then pressing the

but they can also be viewed individually. Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode buttons. 1 Choose a grouped image. 6 Playback Mode 2 zz Press the buttons or turn the View images matching your 7 Wi-Fi Functions specified condition, or jump by <7> dial to choose an image labeled with [ ], and then press the the specified amount. Setting Menu button. 8 zz Turn the ring to view only images matching the condition or jump by the 9 Accessories specified number of images forward or Appendix back. 2 View images in the group 10 individually. Index zz Pressing the buttons or turning the <7> dial will display only images in the group. zz Pressing the button will display [Display all images]. Press to cancel group playback. 111 Cover Editing Face ID Information • During group playback (step 2), you can browse through images quickly Before Use “Navigating through Images in an Index” (= 108) and magnify them If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it or “Magnifying Images” (= 113). By choosing [All Images in Group] for Common Camera erase it. Operations “Protecting Images” (= 116), “Erasing Multiple Images at Once” (= 119), However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (= 180), or “Adding Images to a ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been Basic Guide Photobook” (= 182), all images in the group can be manipulated at once. erased. • To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single still images, Advanced Guide press the button, choose [Group Images] on the [1] tab, and then choose [Off] (= 25). However, grouped images cannot be ungrouped during Changing Names 1 Camera Basics individual playback. 1 Access the setting screen. Auto Mode / zz 2 Hybrid Auto Mode • You can also view group images individually by touching [ ] on the screen Press the button and choose Other Shooting in step 1. [Face ID Info] on the [1] tab (= 25). 3 Modes zz Press the

buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose [Edit ID Info], and 4 P Mode then press the < > button. m 5 Tv, Av, M, and 2 Choose an image. C Mode zz Following the procedure in “Checking 6 Playback Mode People Detected in Face ID” (= 108), choose an image and press the 7 Wi-Fi Functions button. 8 Setting Menu zz An orange frame is displayed around the selected face. When multiple names are 9 Accessories displayed in an image, press the Appendix buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose 10 the name to change, and then press the Index button.

112 Cover 3 Choose the editing option. Image Viewing Options Before Use zz Press the

buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose [Overwrite], Still Images Common Camera Operations and then press the button. Magnifying Images Basic Guide 4 Choose the name of the person 1 Magnify an image. to overwrite with. Advanced Guide zz Moving the zoom lever toward < > will zz Follow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding k zoom in and magnify the image. You Face Information” (= 45) to choose Camera Basics can magnify images up to about 10x by 1 the name of the person you want to continuing to hold the zoom lever. Auto Mode / overwrite with. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz To zoom out, move the zoom lever Other Shooting • You can also access the [Edit ID Info] screen by touching an image on the toward . You can return to single- 3 Modes screen in step 2, touching [ ] to display the orange frame, and then image display by continuing to hold it. 4 P Mode touching the face to overwrite its name. 2 Move the display position and • You can also choose editing options by touching them in step 3. Tv, Av, M, and switch images as needed. 5 C Mode zz To move the display position, press the Playback Mode Erasing Names Approximate Position

buttons. 6 zz Following step 3 in “Changing Names”, of Displayed Area zz To switch to other images while zoomed, choose [Erase] and press the 7 Wi-Fi Functions turn the <7> dial. button. Setting Menu zz After [Erase?] is displayed, press the 8 • You can return to single-image display from magnified display by pressing the buttons or turn the <7> dial to button. 9 Accessories choose [OK], and then press the • You can check the focus when [ ] is displayed by pressing the button. button to enlarge the AF frame position (Focus Check). Press the button 10 Appendix repeatedly to enlarge any other AF frames displayed. • You can also erase names by touching [OK] after [Erase?] is displayed. Index

113 Cover Still Images Movies Touch-Screen Operations Viewing Slideshows Before Use zz Spread your fingers apart (pinch out) to Common Camera zoom in. Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows. Operations zz You can magnify images up to about 10x Basic Guide by repeating this action. 1 Access the setting screen. zz To move the display position, drag across zz Press the button, and then Advanced Guide the screen. choose [Slideshow] on the [1] tab (= 25). 1 Camera Basics zz Pinch in to zoom out. Auto Mode / zz Touch [ ] to restore single-image 2 Hybrid Auto Mode display. 3 Other Shooting 2 Configure the setting. Modes zz Choose a menu item to configure, and 4 P Mode then choose the desired option (= 26). Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode 6 Playback Mode 3 Start automatic playback. 7 Wi-Fi Functions zz Press the

buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose [Start], and then 8 Setting Menu press the button. Accessories zz The slideshow will start after [Loading 9 image] is displayed for a few seconds. 10 Appendix zz Press the button to stop the slideshow. Index

• The camera’s power-saving functions (= 22) are deactivated during slideshows.

114 Cover 2 Choose an image. • To pause or resume slideshows, press the button. Before Use • You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the zz Press the

buttons to buttons or turning the <7> dial. For fast-forward or fast-rewind, hold the choose the image you want to view next. Common Camera Operations buttons down. zz Your chosen image is displayed in the center, surrounded by the next four Basic Guide • You can also stop slideshows by touching the screen. candidate images. Advanced Guide zz For full-screen display of the center image, press the button. To restore Still Images Camera Basics the original display, press the 1 Auto Playback of Related Images button again. Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode (Smart Shuffle) zz Press the button to restore Other Shooting single-image display. Based on the current image, the camera offers four images that you may 3 Modes wish to view. After you choose to view one of those images, the camera 4 P Mode offers four more images. This is an enjoyable way to play back images in • Only still images shot with this camera are played back using Smart an unexpected order. Try this feature after you have taken many shots, in Shuffle. Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode many kinds of scenes. • Smart Shuffle is not available in the following cases: - There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera 6 Playback Mode - An unsupported image is currently displayed 1 Choose Smart Shuffle. - Images are shown in filtered display (= 109) Wi-Fi Functions zz Press the button, choose 7 - During group playback (= 111) [Smart Shuffle] on the [1] tab, and then 8 Setting Menu press the button (= 25). • On the screen in step 2, touching an image above, below, or on either side will Accessories zz Four candidate images are displayed. show your chosen image in the center, surrounded by the next four candidate 9 images. Appendix • For full-screen display of the center image in step 2, touch that image. To 10 restore the original display, touch the screen again. Index

115 Cover Still Images Movies Choosing Images Individually Protecting Images Before Use 1 Common Camera Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure by the camera Choose [Select]. zz Operations (= 118). Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 116), choose [Select] and Basic Guide press the button. Choosing a Selection Method Advanced Guide 2 Choose an image. 1 Access the setting screen. zz Press the buttons or turn the 1 Camera Basics zz Press the button and choose <7> dial to choose an image, and then Auto Mode / [Protect] on the [1] tab (= 25). press the button. [ ] is displayed. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz To cancel selection, press the Other Shooting button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. 3 Modes zz Repeat this process to specify other 4 P Mode images. Tv, Av, M, and 2 Choose a selection method. 3 Protect the image. 5 C Mode zz Choose a menu item and an option as zz Press the button. A Playback Mode desired (= 26). 6 confirmation message is displayed. zz To return to the menu screen, press the zz Press the buttons or turn the 7 Wi-Fi Functions button. <7> dial to choose [OK], and then press Setting Menu the button. 8 Accessories • Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format the 9 • Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or turn card (= 160, 161). Appendix the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3. 10 • Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure function. To Index erase them this way, first cancel protection. • You can also select or clear images by touching the screen in step 2, and you can access the confirmation screen by touching [ ]. • You can also protect images by touching [OK] on the screen in step 3.

116 Cover Selecting a Range zz Press the buttons or turn the Before Use <7> dial to choose an image, and then 1 Choose [Select Range]. press the button. Common Camera Operations zz Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection zz Images before the first image cannot be Method” (= 116), choose [Select selected as the last image. Basic Guide Range] and press the button. Advanced Guide 2 Choose a starting image. zz Press the button. 4 Protect the images. 1 Camera Basics zz Press the

button to choose Auto Mode / [Protect], and then press the 2 Hybrid Auto Mode button. Other Shooting 3 Modes 4 P Mode zz Press the buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose an image, and then Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode press the button. • You can also choose the first or last image by turning the <7> dial when the top screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed. 6 Playback Mode

• You can also display the screen for choosing the first or last image by touching Wi-Fi Functions an image on the top screen in steps 2 or 3. 7 • You can also protect images by touching [Protect] on the screen in step 4. 8 Setting Menu 3 Choose an ending image. Accessories zz Press the button to choose [Last 9 image], and then press the button. 10 Appendix

Index

117 Cover Specifying All Images at Once Still Images Movies Erasing Images Before Use 1 Choose [Select All Images]. Common Camera You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when Operations zz Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected Method” (= 116), choose [Select All images (= 116) cannot be erased. Basic Guide Images] and press the button. 1 Choose an image to erase. Advanced Guide 2 Protect the images. zz Press the buttons or turn the zz Press the

buttons or turn the Camera Basics <7> dial to choose an image. 1 <7> dial to choose [Protect], and then Auto Mode / press the button. 2 Erase the image. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz Press the button. 3 Other Shooting zz After [Erase?] is displayed, press the Modes buttons or turn the <7> dial to 4 P Mode To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in step 4 of choose [Erase], and then press the • Tv, Av, M, and “Selecting a Range” or in step 2 of “Specifying All Images at Once”. button. 5 C Mode zz The current image is now erased. Playback Mode • You can also protect or unlock images by touching [Protect] or [Unlock] on the zz To cancel erasure, press the 6 screens described above. buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose 7 Wi-Fi Functions [Cancel], and then press the button. 8 Setting Menu

• Pressing the button while [ ] images are displayed will give you 9 Accessories the option of choosing [Erase ], [Erase JPEG], or [Erase +JPEG] for deletion. 10 Appendix

Index • You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the screen in step 2. • Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions (= 122).

118 Cover Erasing Multiple Images at Once Choosing Images Individually Before Use You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when erasing 1 Choose [Select]. Common Camera images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected images zz Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection Operations (= 116) cannot be erased. Method” (= 119), choose [Select] and Basic Guide press the button. Choosing a Selection Method 2 Choose an image. Advanced Guide 1 Access the setting screen. zz Once you choose an image following Camera Basics zz Press the button, and then step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually” 1 choose [Erase] on the [1] tab (= 25). (= 116), [ ] is displayed. Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz To cancel selection, press the Other Shooting button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. 3 Modes zz Repeat this process to specify other P Mode images. 4 2 Tv, Av, M, and Choose a selection method. 3 Erase the image. 5 C Mode zz Choose a menu item and an option as zz Press the button. A Playback Mode desired (= 26). confirmation message is displayed. 6 zz To return to the menu screen, press the zz Press the buttons or turn the 7 Wi-Fi Functions button. <7> dial to choose [OK], and then press the button. 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

119 Cover Still Images Movies Selecting a Range Rotating Images Before Use 1 Choose [Select Range]. Common Camera zz Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection Change the orientation of images and save them as follows. Operations Method” (= 119), choose [Select Basic Guide Range] and press the button. 1 Choose [Rotate]. zz 2 Choose images. Press the button and choose Advanced Guide [Rotate] on the [1] tab (= 25). zz Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range” Camera Basics (= 117) to specify images. 1 Auto Mode / 3 Erase the images. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz Press the

button to choose [Erase], Other Shooting and then press the button. 3 Modes 2 Rotate the image. P Mode zz Press the buttons or turn the 4 <7> dial to choose an image. Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode zz The image is rotated 90° each time you press the button. 6 Playback Mode Specifying All Images at Once zz To return to the menu screen, press the 1 Choose [Select All Images]. button. 7 Wi-Fi Functions zz Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection Setting Menu Method” (= 119), choose [Select All • Movies with an image quality of [ ], [ ], or [ ] cannot 8 Images] and press the button. be rotated. 9 Accessories 2 • Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off] (= 121). Erase the images. 10 Appendix zz Press the buttons or turn the • On the screen in step 2, you can also touch [ ] to rotate images or touch <7> dial to choose [OK], and then press [ ] to return to the menu screen. Index the button.

120 Cover Deactivating Auto Rotation Still Images Movies Tagging Images as Favorites Before Use Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates Common Camera images based on the current camera orientation. You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a Operations category in filtered playback, you can restrict the following operations to all Basic Guide zz Press the button, choose [Auto of those images. • Viewing (= 104), Viewing Slideshows (= 114), Protecting Images Rotate] on the [1] tab, and then choose Advanced Guide [Off] (= 25). (= 116), Erasing Images (= 118), Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF) (= 180), Adding Images to a Photobook (= 182) 1 Camera Basics Auto Mode / 1 Choose [Favorites]. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz Press the button and choose Other Shooting [Favorites] on the [1] tab (= 25). 3 Modes • Images cannot be rotated (= 120) when you set [Auto Rotate] to P Mode [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in the 4 original orientation. 5 Tv, Av, M, and • In Smart Shuffle (= 115) mode, even if [Auto Rotate] is set to C Mode [Off], images shot vertically will be displayed vertically, and rotated 6 Playback Mode images will be displayed in the rotated orientation. 2 Choose an image. zz Press the buttons or turn the 7 Wi-Fi Functions <7> dial to choose an image, and then press the button. [ ] is displayed. 8 Setting Menu zz To untag the image, press the Accessories button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. 9 zz Repeat this process to choose additional 10 Appendix images. Index

121 Cover Still Images Movies 3 Finish the setup process. Before Use zz Press the button. A Convenient Control: Touch Actions confirmation message is displayed. Common Camera You can quickly and easily activate functions that you have assigned to four Operations zz Press the buttons or turn the touch gestures (Touch Actions), in single-image display. <7> dial to choose [OK], and then press Basic Guide the button. Using a Function Assigned to [ ] Advanced Guide

zz Drag across the screen as shown. 1 Camera Basics • Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting zz The function assigned to [ ] is now Auto Mode / mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in activated. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode step 3. Other Shooting 3 Modes • Favorite images will have a three-star rating ( ) when transferred to computers running Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista. (Does not 4 P Mode apply to movies or RAW images.) Tv, Av, M, and zz Similarly, you can also activate functions 5 C Mode • You can also select or clear current images by touching the screen in step 2. assigned to [ ], [ ], and [ ] by Playback Mode • Images can also be tagged as favorites by using Touch Actions (= 122). dragging across the screen. 6 zz Customize functions assigned to Touch 7 Wi-Fi Functions Actions as desired. 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

122 Cover Changing Touch Actions Functions Assignable Functions Before Use Simplify your preferred camera operations by reassigning dragging patterns Favorites Tag images as favorites, or untag the image. Common Camera to them as desired. Next Favorite Switch to displaying the next image tagged as a favorite. Operations 1 Previous Favorite Switch to displaying the previous image tagged as a favorite. Basic Guide Access the setting screen. Switch to displaying the first image with the next shooting Next Date zz Press the button, and then date. Advanced Guide choose [Set Touch Actions] on the [1] Switch to displaying the first image with the previous shooting Previous Date tab (= 25). date. 1 Camera Basics 2 Assign a function to a dragging Smart Shuffle Start Smart Shuffle playback. Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode pattern. To Camera Other Shooting zz Press the

buttons or turn the To Smartphone Access the Wi-Fi connection screen. 3 Modes <7> dial to choose a dragging pattern, To Computer For Wi-Fi details, see “Wi-Fi Functions” (= 130). P Mode and then press the buttons to To Printer 4 choose the function to assign. To Web Service Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode Slideshow Start a slideshow. Erase Erase an image. 6 Playback Mode Protect Protect an image or cancel protection. Wi-Fi Functions Rotate Rotate an image. 7 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

123 Cover Editing Still Images 3 Choose an image size. Before Use zz Press the buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose the size, and then Common Camera • Image editing (= 124 – 127) is only available when the memory Operations card has sufficient free space. press the button. zz [Save new image?] is displayed. Basic Guide • You can access editing screens for various functions by touching an image Advanced Guide after choosing the function in the menu. • When [ ] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch [ ] instead of Camera Basics pressing the button, if you prefer. 4 Save the new image. 1 • When [ ] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch [ ] instead of zz Press the buttons or turn the Auto Mode / pressing the button, if you prefer. <7> dial to choose [OK], and then press 2 Hybrid Auto Mode the button. 3 Other Shooting Still Images zz The image is now saved as a new file. Modes Resizing Images 4 P Mode Save a copy of images at a lower resolution. Tv, Av, M, and 5 Review the new image. 5 C Mode 1 Choose [Resize]. zz Press the button. [Display new 6 Playback Mode image?] is displayed. zz Press the button and choose Wi-Fi Functions [Resize] on the [1] tab (= 25). zz Press the buttons or turn the 7 <7> dial to choose [Yes], and then press Setting Menu 2 Choose an image. the button. 8 zz Press the buttons or turn the zz The saved image is now displayed. Accessories <7> dial to choose an image, and then 9 press the button. • Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [ ] 10 Appendix (= 47) or saved as [ ] in step 3. • RAW images cannot be edited. Index

• Images cannot be resized to a higher resolution.

• You can also configure this setting by touching the size on the screen in step 3, touching it again, and then touching [OK]. • You can also view saved images by touching [Yes] on the screen in step 5. 124 Cover Still Images 4 Save as a new image and Cropping review. Before Use zz Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images” Common Camera You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image file. (= 124). Operations Basic Guide 1 Choose [Cropping]. • Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [ ] zz Press the button, and then (= 47) or resized to [ ] (= 124). Advanced Guide choose [Cropping] on the [1] tab • RAW images cannot be edited. (= 25). 1 Camera Basics • Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio after cropping. 2 Choose an image. Auto Mode / • Cropped images will have a lower resolution than uncropped images. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz Press the buttons or turn the • If you crop still images shot using Face ID (= 41), only the names of the Other Shooting <7> dial to choose an image, and then people left in the cropped image will remain. 3 Modes press the button. Cropping Area • To move the frame, drag either image on the screen in step 3. 4 P Mode 3 Adjust the cropping area. You can also resize frames by pinching in or out ( 114) on the screen in • = Tv, Av, M, and zz A frame is displayed around the portion of step 3. 5 C Mode the image to be cropped. Playback Mode zz The original image is shown in the upper Still Images 6 left, and a preview of the image as Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) Wi-Fi Functions cropped is shown in the lower right. 7 You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a separate zz To resize the frame, move the zoom Setting Menu file. For details on each option, see “Changing Image Color Tones (My 8 lever. Colors)” (= 78). Preview of Image After zz To move the frame, press the 9 Accessories Cropping

buttons. 1 Appendix Resolution After Cropping zz To change the frame orientation, press Choose [My Colors]. 10 zz Press the button, and then the button. Index choose [My Colors] on the [1] tab zz Faces detected in the image are (= 25). enclosed in gray frames in the upper-left image. To crop the image based on this frame, turn the <7> dial to switch to the other frame. zz Press the button. 125 Cover 2 Choose an image. Still Images zz Press the buttons or turn the Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) Before Use <7> dial to choose an image, and then Common Camera press the button. Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be Operations detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufficient 3 Choose an option. overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects Basic Guide zz Press the buttons or turn the stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the Advanced Guide <7> dial to choose an option, and then image as a separate file. press the button. 1 Camera Basics 1 Choose [i-Contrast]. 4 Save as a new image and zz Press the < > button, and then Auto Mode / review. n 2 Hybrid Auto Mode choose [i-Contrast] on the [1] tab zz Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images” Other Shooting (= 25). 3 (= 124). Modes 2 Choose an image. 4 P Mode Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be a little zz • Press the buttons or turn the Tv, Av, M, and lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the desired <7> dial to choose an image, and then 5 C Mode color. press the button. • Colors of RAW images cannot be edited. 6 Playback Mode 3 Choose an option. Wi-Fi Functions • The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly from the color zz Press the buttons or turn the 7 of images shot using My Colors (= 78). <7> dial to choose an option, and then Setting Menu press the button. 8 • You can also configure this setting by touching an option to select it on the Accessories screen in step 3 and then touching it again. 4 Save as a new image and 9 review. Appendix zz Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images” 10 (= 124). Index

• For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause images to appear grainy. • Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function. • RAW images cannot be edited this way.

126 Cover 4 Save as a new image and • If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting images using Before Use [Low], [Medium], or [High]. review. zz Press the

buttons or Common Camera Operations • You can also configure this setting by touching [q][r] on the screen in step 3. turn the <7> dial to choose [New File], and then press the button. Basic Guide zz The image is now saved as a new file. Advanced Guide Still Images zz Follow step 5 in “Resizing Images” (= 124). Correcting Red-Eye 1 Camera Basics Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the • Some images may not be corrected accurately. Auto Mode / corrected image as a separate file. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode • To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose Other Shooting [Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be erased. 3 Modes 1 Choose [Red-Eye Correction]. • Protected images cannot be overwritten. zz Press the button, and then • RAW images cannot be edited this way. 4 P Mode choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [1] • Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images shot in [ ], but Tv, Av, M, and tab (= 25). the original image cannot be overwritten. 5 C Mode

Playback Mode 2 Choose an image. • You can save images by touching [New File] or [Overwrite] on the screen in 6 zz Press the buttons or turn the step 4. Wi-Fi Functions <7> dial to choose an image. 7 3 Correct the image. 8 Setting Menu zz Press the button. Accessories zz Red-eye detected by the camera is now 9 corrected, and frames are displayed 10 Appendix around corrected image areas. zz Enlarge or reduce images as needed. Index Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images” (= 113).

127 Cover Movies 3 Review the edited movie. Editing Movies zz Press the

buttons to choose Before Use [ ], and then press the button. Common Camera You can cut movies to remove unneeded portions at the beginning or end. The edited movie is now played. Operations zz To edit the movie again, repeat step 2. Basic Guide 1 Choose [*]. zz To cancel editing, press the

zz Following steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing” buttons to choose [ ]. Press the Advanced Guide (= 104), choose [*] and press the button, choose [OK] (either press the button. buttons or turn the <7> dial), 1 Camera Basics zz The movie editing panel and editing bar and then press the button again. Auto Mode / are now displayed. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode 4 Save the edited movie. Other Shooting zz Press the

buttons to choose 3 Modes Movie Editing Panel [ ], and then press the button. 2 Specify portions to cut. P Mode zz Press the

buttons or 4 zz Press the

buttons to choose turn the <7> dial to choose [New File], Tv, Av, M, and [ ] or [ ]. 5 C Mode and then press the button. zz To view the portions you can cut zz The movie is now saved as a new file. 6 Playback Mode (identified by [ ] on the screen), press zz Choose [Save w/o Comp.], and then the buttons or turn the <7> Wi-Fi Functions press the button. 7 dial to move [ ]. Cut the beginning of the movie (from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and 8 Setting Menu Movie Editing Bar cut the end of the movie by choosing [ ]. 9 Accessories zz If you move [ ] to a position other than a 10 Appendix [ ] mark, in [ ] the portion before the • To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose [Overwrite] nearest [ ] mark on the left will be cut, Index in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be erased. while in [ ] the portion after the nearest • If the memory card lacks sufficient space, only [Overwrite] will be [ ] mark on the right will be cut. available. • Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving is in progress. • When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery pack or an AC adapter kit (sold separately, = 168). 128 Cover Movies Reducing File Sizes Editing Digest Movies Before Use Movie file sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows. Common Camera Individual chapters (clips) (= 32) recorded in [ ] mode can be erased, as Operations needed. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot be recovered. zz On the screen in step 2 of “Editing Basic Guide Movies”, choose [ ]. Choose [New File], 1 Select the clip to erase. and then press the button. Advanced Guide zz Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Viewing Short zz Choose [Compress & Sav.], and then Movies Created When Shooting Still Camera Basics press the button. 1 Images (Digest Movies)” (= 107) to Auto Mode / play a movie created in [ ] mode, and 2 Hybrid Auto Mode then press the button to access the Other Shooting • Compressed movies are saved in [ ] format. movie control panel. 3 Modes • [ ] movies cannot be compressed. zz Press the buttons or turn the • Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you choose 4 P Mode [Overwrite]. <7> dial to choose [ ] or [ ], and then press the button. Tv, Av, M, and • However, you can compress and save edited movies as new files by choosing 5 C Mode [Compress & Sav.]. 2 Choose [ ]. zz Press the buttons or turn the 6 Playback Mode <7> dial to choose [ ], and then press Wi-Fi Functions the button. 7 zz The selected clip is played back 8 Setting Menu repeatedly. Accessories 3 Confirm erasure. 9 zz Press the buttons or turn the 10 Appendix <7> dial to choose [OK], and then press the button. Index zz The clip is erased, and the short movie is overwritten.

• [ ] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is connected to a printer. 129 Cover

Before Use

Common Camera Operations 7 Wi-Fi Functions Basic Guide Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety of compatible devices, and use the camera Advanced Guide with Web services 1 Camera Basics Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting 3 Modes 4 P Mode Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode What You Can Do with Wi-Fi...... 131 Installing the Software...... 137 Sending Images...... 148 Preparing to Share Images via Wi-Fi...... 132 Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection Sending Images Individually...... 148 Playback Mode (Windows Only)...... 139 6 Uploading Images to Web Services...... 132 Sending Multiple Images...... 149 Sending Images to a Smartphone...... 132 Accessing the Wi-Fi Menu...... 139 Adding Comments...... 149 7 Wi-Fi Functions Sending Images to Another Camera...... 132 Initial Connection via Wi-Fi...... 139 Saving Images to a Computer...... 150 Sending Images to a Computer...... 133 After the Initial Wi-Fi Connection...... 140 Sending Images Automatically 8 Setting Menu Printing Images Wirelessly...... 133 Connecting via an Access Point...... 140 (Image Sync)...... 151 Registering Web Services...... 133 Confirming Access Point Compatibility...... 140 Initial Preparations...... 151 9 Accessories Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY...... 134 Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access Points...141 Sending Images...... 152 Registering Other Web Services...... 136 Connecting to Access Points in the List...... 144 Geotagging Images on the Camera...... 153 10 Appendix Connecting without an Access Point...... 145 Installing CameraWindow on a Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings...... 153 Smartphone...... 136 Previous Access Points...... 146 Index Editing Connection Information...... 153 Preparing to Register a Computer...... 137 Connecting to Another Camera...... 147 Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default...... 155 Checking Your Computer Environment...... 137

130 Cover What You Can Do with Wi-Fi Connecting to a Computer Before Use Use the software to wirelessly send images from the camera to This camera is an approved Wi-Fi®* product. You can wirelessly connect to a computer. Common Camera and send images to the following devices and services. Operations Note that, in this chapter, wireless LAN functions other than Wi-Fi may be referred to as Wi-Fi. Connecting to a Printer Basic Guide * Wi-Fi is a brand name that indicates interoperability certification of wireless Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer LAN devices. (supporting DPS over IP) to print them. Advanced Guide

Connecting to Web Services • Before using Wi-Fi, be sure to read “Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) 1 Camera Basics Images can be sent to social network services and other Web Precautions” (= 211) and “Security Precautions” (= 212). Auto Mode / services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY*. Unsent images on 2 Hybrid Auto Mode the camera can also be sent automatically to a computer or Other Shooting Web service via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. 3 Modes * CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is an online photo service available to 4 P Mode those who have purchased this product. Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode Connecting to a Smartphone Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that 6 Playback Mode have Wi-Fi functions. You can also geotag your shots from a connected smartphone or tablet. 7 Wi-Fi Functions For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets, and Setting Menu other compatible devices are collectively referred to as 8 “smartphones”. 9 Accessories Connecting to Another Camera 10 Appendix Use the Wi-Fi function to send images between Canon-brand, compact digital cameras. Index

131 Cover Preparing to Share Images via Wi-Fi Sending Images to a Smartphone Before Use Sending images via Wi-Fi requires some initial preparation on the camera Common Camera Internet CameraWindow and target devices. Preparations and methods of sending images vary Operations depending on the destination. Note that before using Wi-Fi (= 139), you will need to register a camera Basic Guide nickname on the camera. Camera Advanced Guide Smartphone Uploading Images to Web Services Tablet computer Access point 1 Camera Basics Auto Mode / SNS, video-sharing CANON iMAGE Install CameraWindow on a smartphone (= 136) 2 Hybrid Auto Mode sites, e-mail Connect directly (= 145) or via an access point (= 140) GATEWAY Other Shooting Send images (= 148) 3 Modes 4 P Mode Access point Sending Images to Another Camera Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode Camera Computer or smartphone browsers 6 Playback Mode Camera Camera Register Web services (= 133) 7 Wi-Fi Functions Connect via an access point (= 140) Connect to another camera (= 147) Send images (= 148)* Send images (= 148) 8 Setting Menu * You can send images to a computer or Web service (= 151). 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

132 Cover Sending Images to a Computer Registering Web Services Before Use Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that you Common Camera Internet want to use. CameraWindow Operations • A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is Basic Guide required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY and other Web services. Advanced Guide Access point • Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser Camera Computer (Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and 1 Camera Basics version information. Check your computer environment (= 137) Auto Mode / • For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Install CameraWindow on a computer (= 137) GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/ Configure the computer for a Wi-Fi connection (Windows only, = 139) Other Shooting cig/). 3 Modes Connect via an access point (= 140) Save images to a computer (= 150) • You must have an account with Web services other than CANON iMAGE 4 P Mode GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check the Tv, Av, M, and websites for each Web service you want to register. 5 C Mode Printing Images Wirelessly • Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable. 6 Playback Mode

Wi-Fi Functions Camera Printer 7 Access point 8 Setting Menu

Accessories Connect directly (= 145) or via an access point (= 140) 9 Print images (= 176) 10 Appendix

Index

133 Cover Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 4 Choose [ ]. zz Before Use After linking the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, add CANON Press the

buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose [ ], and Common Camera iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera. Operations then press the button. Basic Guide 1 Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY and access the Advanced Guide camera settings page. zz From a computer or smartphone, access 5 Establish a connection with the 1 Camera Basics http://www.canon.com/cig/ and visit the access point. Auto Mode / CANON iMAGE GATEWAY site for your zz Press the buttons or turn the 2 Hybrid Auto Mode region. <7> dial to choose [Authenticate], and 3 Other Shooting zz Access the camera settings page. then press the button. Modes zz Once the login screen is displayed, 4 P Mode enter your user name and password Tv, Av, M, and to log in. If you do not have a CANON 5 C Mode iMAGE GATEWAY account, follow 6 Choose an access point. the instructions to complete member zz Press the

buttons or turn the 6 Playback Mode registration (free of charge). <7> dial to choose a network (access point), and then press the button. 7 Wi-Fi Functions 2 Choose your camera model. zz On this camera model, [ ] is displayed 8 Setting Menu in the Wi-Fi menu. 9 Accessories zz Once you choose the model, a page is displayed for entering the authentication 7 Enter the access point 10 Appendix code. On this page in step 9, you will password. enter the authentication code displayed zz Press the button to access the Index on the camera after steps 3 – 8. keyboard, and then enter the password (= 141). 3 Access the Wi-Fi menu. zz Press the

buttons or turn the zz On the camera, access the Wi-Fi menu <7> dial to choose [Next], and then (= 139). press the button. 134 Cover 8 Choose [Auto] and establish the zz Complete the setup process on the Before Use connection. smartphone or computer. zz Press the

buttons or turn the Common Camera Operations <7> dial to choose [Auto], and then press the button. Basic Guide zz [ ] (= 151) and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY are now added as Advanced Guide destinations, and the [ ] icon changes zz Once the camera is connected to CANON Camera Basics to [ ]. 1 iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point, zz A message is displayed on the Auto Mode / an authentication code is displayed. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode smartphone or computer to indicate that Other Shooting this process is finished. To add other 3 Modes Web services, follow the procedure in “Registering Other Web Services” 4 P Mode (= 136) from step 2. Tv, Av, M, and 9 Enter the authentication code. 5 C Mode zz On the smartphone or computer, enter • You can connect to WPS-compatible access points by choosing [WPS 6 Playback Mode the authentication code displayed on the Connection] in step 6. For details, see steps 6 – 8 in “Connecting to WPS- camera and go to the next step. Compatible Access Points” (= 142). 7 Wi-Fi Functions zz A six-digit confirmation number is Setting Menu displayed. 8 10 Check the confirmation 9 Accessories numbers and complete the setup process. 10 Appendix zz Make sure the confirmation number on Index the camera matches the number on the smartphone or computer. zz Press the buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose [OK], and then press the button.

135 Cover Registering Other Web Services Installing CameraWindow on a Before Use You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the Smartphone Common Camera camera. Note that CANON iMAGE GATEWAY must be registered on the Operations camera first (= 134). Before connecting your camera to a smartphone, first install the free dedicated application, CameraWindow, on your smartphone. Basic Guide

1 Access the Web service Advanced Guide settings screen. 1 Connect the smartphone to a network. zz Follow step 1 in “Registering CANON 1 Camera Basics iMAGE GATEWAY” (= 134) to log in Auto Mode / to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, and then 2 Hybrid Auto Mode access the Web service settings screen. 3 Other Shooting 2 2 Install CameraWindow. Modes Configure the Web service you zz want to use. For an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch, 4 P Mode download and install CameraWindow zz Follow the instructions displayed on the from the App Store. Tv, Av, M, and smartphone or computer to set up the 5 C Mode zz For an Android device, download and Web service. install CameraWindow from Google Play. 6 Playback Mode 3 Choose [ ]. zz After installation, use the camera Wi-Fi Functions zz Access the Wi-Fi menu (= 139), choose to establish a connection with the 7 [ ] (either press the

smartphone (= 140, 145). 8 Setting Menu buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then press the button. • For details on this application (supported smartphones and included functions), 9 Accessories zz The Web service settings are now refer to the Canon website. updated. 10 Appendix

Index • If any configured settings change, follow these steps again to update the camera settings.

136 Cover Preparing to Register a Computer Installing the Software Before Use Prepare to register a computer. To save images to the computer wirelessly, Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration. Common Camera you must install CameraWindow. Operations What you will need: Checking Your Computer Environment zz Computer Basic Guide zz USB cable (camera end: Mini-B)* The camera can connect via Wi-Fi to computers running the following Advanced Guide * A USB cable is not included. Although you can install the software without using a operating systems. For detailed system requirements and compatibility cable, some features will not be added. information, including support in new operating systems, visit the Canon 1 Camera Basics website. 1 Download the software. Auto Mode / Windows Macintosh 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz With a computer connected to the Operating Mac OS X 10.6.8 Other Shooting Windows 8 3 Modes System Mac OS X 10.7 Internet, access http://www.canon.com/ Windows 7 SP1 icpd/. Mac OS X 10.8.2 or later P Mode zz Access the site for your country or region. 4 zz Download the software. Tv, Av, M, and • Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported. 5 C Mode • Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version) 2 Begin the installation. 6 Playback Mode require a separate download and installation of Windows Media zz Click [Easy Installation] and follow the Feature Pack. on-screen instructions to complete the 7 Wi-Fi Functions For details, check the following website. installation process. http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

137 Cover 3 When a message is displayed 4 Install the files. Before Use prompting you to connect the zz Installation may take some time, depending camera, choose whether to on computer performance and the Internet Common Camera Operations connect or not. connection. Basic Guide When Connecting the Camera to zz the Computer Click [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen after installation. zz With the camera turned off, open the Advanced Guide zz After installation when the camera is cover ( ). With the smaller plug of the connected to the computer, turn the Camera Basics USB cable in the orientation shown, 1 camera off before disconnecting the insert the plug fully into the camera Auto Mode / cable. 2 terminal ( ). Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting • Using the software, you can update to the latest version, and download new 3 Modes functions via the Internet (some software excluded). P Mode • The first time you connect the camera to the computer, drivers will be installed, 4 so it may take a few minutes until camera images are accessible. Tv, Av, M, and • Because the content and functions of software vary according to the camera 5 C Mode model, if you have several cameras, you must use each camera to update to zz Playback Mode Insert the larger plug of the USB cable its latest version of the software. 6 in the computer’s USB port. For details about USB connections on the computer, 7 Wi-Fi Functions refer to the computer user manual. Setting Menu zz Turn the camera on, and follow the 8 on-screen instructions to complete the 9 Accessories installation process. Without Connecting the Camera 10 Appendix zz Select [Install without connecting Index the device] and follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation process.

138 Cover Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Accessing the Wi-Fi Menu Before Use Connection (Windows Only) Initial Connection via Wi-Fi Common Camera On a computer running Windows, configure the following settings before Operations connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly. To start with, register a camera nickname. This nickname will be displayed on the screen of target devices when Basic Guide connecting to other devices via Wi-Fi. 1 Confirm that the computer is Advanced Guide connected to the access point. 1 Access the Wi-Fi menu. zz For instructions on checking your network 1 Camera Basics zz Press the <1> button to turn the camera connection, refer to the computer user Auto Mode / manual. on. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz 2 Configure the setting. Press the button. Other Shooting 3 Modes zz Click in the following order: [Start] menu ► [All Programs] ► [Canon Utilities] ► 2 Enter a nickname. 4 P Mode ► [CameraWindow] [Wi-Fi connection zz Press the button to access the Tv, Av, M, and setup]. keyboard, and then enter a nickname 5 C Mode zz In the application that opens, follow the (= 27). Playback Mode on-screen instructions and configure the zz Up to 16 characters can be used. 6 setting. zz Press the

buttons or turn the 7 Wi-Fi Functions <7> dial to choose [OK], and then press • The following Windows settings are configured when you run the utility in the button. 8 Setting Menu step 2. - Turn on media streaming. zz The Wi-Fi menu is displayed. 9 Accessories This will enable the camera to see (find) the computer to access via Wi-Fi. - Turn on network discovery. 10 Appendix This will enable the computer to see (find) the camera. Index - Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol). This allows you to check the network connection status. - Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP). This will enable network devices to detect each other automatically. • Some security software may prevent you from completing the settings as described here. Check the settings of your security software. 139 Cover Connecting via an Access Point • When connecting wirelessly to any device other than a computer, a memory Before Use card must be inserted in the camera. Additionally, the memory card must Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows. contain images in order for you to access Web services or connect to a Common Camera Also refer to the access point user manual. Operations smartphone or printer wirelessly. • To change the camera’s nickname, choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [3] tab, and Basic Guide then choose [Change Device Nickname]. Confirming Access Point Compatibility • Nicknames beginning with a space cannot be entered in step 2. If you attempt Confirm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi Advanced Guide to do this and press the button on the keyboard screen, a message standards in “Specifications” (= 204). will be displayed. Press the button to access the keyboard, and then If you are already using Wi-Fi, confirm the following items. For instructions 1 Camera Basics enter a new nickname. on checking network settings, refer to the access point user manual. Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode After the Initial Wi-Fi Connection • If system administrator status is needed to adjust network settings, Other Shooting contact the system administrator for details. 3 Modes • Once you have connected to devices via Wi-Fi, recent destinations will These settings are very important for network security. Exercise be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the • P Mode adequate caution when changing these settings. 4 button. You can easily connect again by pressing the

buttons Tv, Av, M, and to choose the device name and then pressing the button. 5 C Mode To add a new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the • Playback Mode buttons, and then configure the setting. 6 7 Wi-Fi Functions • If you prefer not to display recent target devices, press the button, and on the [3] tab, choose [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off]. 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

140 Cover Check sheet Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access Points Before Use Network name (SSID/ESSID) WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over Common Camera The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Wi‑Fi. You can use either Push Button Configuration Method or PIN Method Also called the “access point name” or “network name”. Operations for settings on a WPS supported device. ○ None Basic Guide ○ WEP (open system Network authentication / data encryption (encryption authentication) 1 Confirm that the target device is Advanced Guide method / encryption mode) ○ WPA-PSK (TKIP) connected to the access point. The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. ○ WPA-PSK (AES) zz This step is not required when connecting Camera Basics ○ WPA2-PSK (TKIP) 1 to Web services. ○ WPA2-PSK (AES) Auto Mode / zz Password (encryption key / network key) For instructions on checking the 2 Hybrid Auto Mode The key used when encrypting data during wireless connection, refer to the device and Other Shooting transmission. Also called the “encryption key” or “network access point user manuals. 3 Modes key”. 2 4 P Mode Key index (transmit key) Access the Wi-Fi menu The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / ○ 1 (= 139). Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode data encryption. 3 Choose the target device. Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point supports zz Choose the target device (either press 6 Playback Mode Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) or not. Refer to the user manual provided with the

buttons or turn Wi-Fi Functions your access point to check if it supports WPS. the <7> dial), and then press the 7 button. 8 Setting Menu • A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for connecting zz To connect to a smartphone, choose [ ]. multiple computers. A router that contains an internal Wi-Fi function is called a zz To connect to a computer, choose [ ]. Accessories “Wi-Fi router”. 9 zz To connect to a printer, choose [2]. • This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access points”. Appendix • If you use MAC address filtering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure to add the 10 camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can check your camera’s Index MAC address by choosing the [3] tab, [Wi-Fi Settings], and then [Check MAC Address].

141 Cover zz To connect to a Web service, choose 6 Choose [WPS Connection]. Before Use the service icon. If multiple recipients zz Press the

buttons or turn the or sharing options are used with a Web <7> dial to choose [WPS Connection], Common Camera Operations service, choose the desired item on the and then press the button. [Select Recipient] screen (either press Basic Guide the

buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then press the button. Advanced Guide

4 Choose [Add a Device]. 7 Choose [PBC Method]. 1 Camera Basics zz Press the

buttons or turn the zz Press the

buttons or turn the Auto Mode / <7> dial to choose [Add a Device], and <7> dial to choose [PBC Method], and 2 Hybrid Auto Mode then press the button. then press the button. Other Shooting 3 Modes 4 P Mode 5 To connect to a smartphone or Tv, Av, M, and printer: 5 C Mode Choose [Switch Network]. 8 Establish the connection. zz Playback Mode zz When the [Waiting to connect] screen On the access point, hold down the WPS 6 connection button for a few seconds. is displayed (= 145), choose [Switch 7 Wi-Fi Functions Network] (either press the zz On the camera, press the button. buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then zz The camera will connect to the access 8 Setting Menu press the button. point. 9 Accessories zz If you have selected [ ], [2], or [ ] in step 3, devices connected to the access 10 Appendix point are listed on the [Select a Device] screen displayed next. Index zz If you have selected a Web service in step 3, go to step 11.

142 Cover 9 To connect to a smartphone, 11 Send or print the images. Before Use printer, or computer: zz The screen displayed when the devices Choose the target device. are connected varies depending on the Common Camera target device. Operations zz Press the

buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose the computer name, zz When the camera is connected to a Basic Guide and then press the button. smartphone or Web service, an image Advanced Guide zz If you have selected a smartphone, transfer screen is displayed. For printer, or Macintosh computer, go to instructions on sending images, see Camera Basics step 11. “Sending Images” (= 148). 1 zz When the camera is connected to a Auto Mode / 10 If you have selected a computer 2 Hybrid Auto Mode computer, the camera screen is blank. running Windows in step 9 for Other Shooting Follow the steps in “Saving Images to a the first time: 3 Modes Computer” (= 150) to save images to Install a driver. the computer. 4 P Mode zz When the screen at left is displayed on zz When the camera is connected to a Tv, Av, M, and the camera, click the Start menu on the printer, you can print by following the 5 C Mode computer, click [Control Panel], and then same steps as for printing via USB. For Playback Mode click [Add a device]. 6 details, see “Printing Images” (= 176). 7 Wi-Fi Functions zz Double-click the connected camera icon. • If you chose [PIN Method] in step 7, a PIN code will be displayed on the Setting Menu zz Driver installation will begin. screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point. Choose a device in the 8 [Select a Device] screen. For further details, refer to the user manual included zz After driver installation is complete, and with your access point. 9 Accessories the camera and computer connection • To add multiple destinations, repeat this procedure from the first step. is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be 10 Appendix displayed. Nothing will be displayed on the camera screen. Index

143 Cover 3 Enter the access point Before Use Previous Access Points password. You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by following zz Press the button to access the Common Camera step 4 in “Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 142). Operations keyboard, and then enter the password • To reconnect to the access point, confirm that the target device is already (= 141). Basic Guide connected to it, and then follow the procedure from step 9. Note that this step is not required when connecting to Web services. zz Press the

buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose [Next], and then Advanced Guide • To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen press the button. displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the 1 Camera Basics procedure from step 6. 4 Choose [Auto]. Auto Mode / zz Press the

buttons or turn the 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Connecting to Access Points in the List <7> dial to choose [Auto], and then Other Shooting press the button. 3 Modes 1 View the listed access points. zz If you selected [ ], [2], or [ ] as the 4 P Mode zz View the listed networks (access target device, see “Connecting to WPS- Tv, Av, M, and points) as described in steps 1 – 5 of Compatible Access Points”, starting with 5 C Mode “Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access step 9 (= 143). Playback Mode Points” (= 141 – 142). zz If you selected a Web service as the 6 destination, see “Connecting to WPS- 2 Choose an access point. Wi-Fi Functions Compatible Access Points”, starting with 7 zz Press the

buttons or turn the step 11 (= 143). Setting Menu <7> dial to choose a network (access 8 point), and then press the button. • To determine the access point password, check on the access point itself or 9 Accessories refer to the user manual. • Up to 16 access points will be displayed. If no access points are detected, 10 Appendix choose [Manual Settings] in step 2 to manually set an access point. Follow on- screen instructions and enter an SSID, security settings, and a password. Index • When you use an access point that you have already connected to for connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the password in step 3. To use the same password, choose [Next] (either press the

buttons or turn the <7> dial) and press the button.

144 Cover Connecting without an Access Point 4 On the target device, connect Before Use When connecting to a smartphone or printer via Wi-Fi, you can use the to the network identified on the camera. Common Camera camera as an access point (Camera Access Point mode) instead of using Operations another access point. zz In the smartphone or printer’s Wi-Fi Similarly, no access point is used in camera-to-camera connections setting menu, choose the SSID (network Basic Guide (= 147). name) displayed on the camera. Advanced Guide 5 For a smartphone connection: 1 Access the Wi-Fi menu Start CameraWindow on the 1 Camera Basics (= 139). smartphone. Auto Mode / 2 Choose the target device. zz The first time CameraWindow starts 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz Choose the target device (either press up, register a smartphone nickname for Other Shooting 3 Modes the

buttons or turn display on the camera. the <7> dial), and then press the zz Once the smartphone is recognized on 4 P Mode the camera, the device connection screen button. Tv, Av, M, and zz To connect to a smartphone, choose [ ]. will be displayed on the camera. 5 C Mode zz To connect to a printer, choose [2]. 6 Choose the target device. 6 Playback Mode zz 3 Choose [Add a Device]. Choose the target device name (either press the

buttons or turn the Wi-Fi Functions zz Press the

buttons or turn the 7 <7> dial), and then press the <7> dial to choose [Add a Device], and Setting Menu button. 8 then press the button. 9 Accessories

7 For a smartphone connection: 10 Appendix zz The camera’s SSID is displayed. Adjust the privacy setting. Index zz Press the buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose [Yes], and then press the button. zz You can now use the smartphone to receive images sent from the camera, or to geotag images on the camera (= 153). 145 Cover Previous Access Points 8 Send or print the images. Before Use zz The screen displayed when the devices You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by following are connected varies depending on the Common Camera step 3 in “Connecting without an Access Point” (= 145). Operations target device. • To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose [Set Basic Guide zz When the camera is connected to a Camera As Access Point]. smartphone, an image transfer screen Advanced Guide is displayed. For instructions on sending • When reconnecting via a previous access point, connect the target images, see “Sending Images” (= 148). device to the access point in step 4. 1 Camera Basics zz When the camera is connected to a • To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen Auto Mode / printer, you can print by following the displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the 2 Hybrid Auto Mode same steps as for printing via USB. For procedure in “Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access Points” from step 6 3 Other Shooting details, see “Printing Images” (= 176). (= 142). Modes 4 P Mode • All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected Tv, Av, M, and smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 7. To keep camera 5 C Mode images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the smartphone, choose [No] in step 7. 6 Playback Mode • To change privacy settings for smartphones added to the list, choose the smartphone whose settings you want to change from 7 Wi-Fi Functions [Edit a Device] in step 3, and then choose [View Settings]. 8 Setting Menu To add multiple devices, repeat this procedure from the first step. • Accessories • For better security, you can require password input on the screen in step 3 9 by accessing MENU and choosing [3] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Password] Appendix ► [On]. In this case, in the password field on the device in step 4, enter the 10 password displayed on the camera. Index

146 Cover Connecting to Another Camera zz When the target camera has been added Before Use successfully, the image transfer screen Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as follows. will be displayed. Proceed to “Sending Common Camera Images” (= 148). Operations • Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can be connected to wirelessly. Even Canon-brand cameras that support Eye-Fi cards cannot Basic Guide be connected to if they do not have a Wi-Fi function. You cannot connect to PowerShot SD430 DIGITAL ELPH WIRELESS/DIGITAL IXUS WIRELESS Advanced Guide cameras with this camera. • To add multiple cameras, repeat the above procedures starting from step 1. 1 Camera Basics • Once a camera is added, the camera name will be displayed on the screen in Auto Mode / 1 Access the Wi-Fi menu step 3. To connect to a camera again, simply choose the camera name from 2 Hybrid Auto Mode (= 139). the list. Other Shooting 2 Choose camera. 3 Modes zz Press the

buttons or 4 P Mode turn the <7> dial to choose [4], and Tv, Av, M, and then press the button. 5 C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 3 Choose [Add a Device]. Setting Menu zz Press the

buttons or turn the 8 <7> dial to choose [Add a Device], and 9 Accessories then press the button. zz Follow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera 10 Appendix too. Index zz Camera connection information will be added when [Start connection on target camera] is displayed on both camera screens.

147 Cover Sending Images • For movies that you do not compress (= 128), a separate, Before Use Send images wirelessly to destinations registered on the camera as follows. compressed file is sent instead of the original file. Note that this Common Camera Note that when images are sent to a computer, the computer is used may delay transmission, and the file cannot be sent unless there is Operations instead of the camera (= 150). enough space for it on the memory card. Basic Guide Sending Images Individually • Keep your fingers or other objects off the Wi-Fi antenna area (= 3). Covering this may decrease the speed of your image transfers. Advanced Guide Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take a long 1 Choose an image. • time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera battery level. 1 Camera Basics zz Turn the <7> dial to choose an image • When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image quality Auto Mode / to send. varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the smartphone user 2 Hybrid Auto Mode manual. 2 Send the image. Other Shooting • To disconnect from the camera, press the button, choose [OK] on 3 Modes zz Press the buttons to choose the confirmation screen (either press the buttons or turn the <7> [Send this image], and then press the dial), and then press the button. You can also use the smartphone to 4 P Mode button. end the connection. Tv, Av, M, and zz When uploading to YouTube, read the • On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following icons. 5 C Mode terms of service, choose [I Agree], and [ ] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak • Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending images Playback Mode press the button. 6 you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server. zz Image transfer will begin. The screen 7 Wi-Fi Functions darkens during image transfer. zz Choosing the Image Resolution (Size) Setting Menu After images are uploaded to a Web On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the

8 service, [OK] is displayed. Press the buttons, and then press the button. On the next screen, choose the 9 Accessories button to return to the playback resolution by pressing the

buttons, and then press the screen. button. 10 Appendix zz After sending images to a camera or • To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option. smartphone, [Transfer completed] will be Index • Choosing [ ] or [ ] will resize images that are larger than the selected displayed, and the display will return to size before sending. the image transfer screen.

• Movies cannot be resized.

148 Cover Sending Multiple Images • Up to 50 images can be sent together at once. Only one movie can be sent. Before Use • Movies up to five minutes (or digest movies up to 13 minutes) can be sent. 1 Choose [Select and send]. • Web services may limit the number of images you can send. For details, refer Common Camera Operations zz Press the buttons to choose to the Web service you are using. [Select and send], and then press the • You can also choose images in step 2 by moving the zoom lever twice toward Basic Guide button. to access single-image display and then pressing the buttons or turning the <7> dial. Advanced Guide • In step 3, you can choose the desired resolution (size) of your images before sending (= 47). 1 Camera Basics Auto Mode / 2 Choose images. Adding Comments 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz Press the

buttons to 3 Other Shooting choose an image to send, and then press Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send to Modes e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of characters the button. [ ] is displayed. P Mode and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the Web service. 4 zz To cancel selection, press the Tv, Av, M, and button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. 5 C Mode zz Repeat this process to choose additional 1 Access the screen for adding Playback Mode images. comments. 6 zz Press the

buttons to zz After you finish choosing images, press 7 Wi-Fi Functions the button. choose [ ], and then press the button. Setting Menu 3 Send the images. 8 2 Add a comment (= 27). zz Press the buttons or turn the 9 Accessories <7> dial to choose [Send], and then 3 Send the image. press the button. zz Follow the steps in “Sending Images 10 Appendix Individually” (= 148) to send the image. Index

• When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent.

149 Cover Saving Images to a Computer • Movies will take longer to import since the file size is larger than still images. Before Use When sending images to a computer, use the computer instead of the • To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera. • You can also specify to save all images or only selected images to the Common Camera camera. Operations Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration. computer, and you can change the destination folder. Refer to “Software For other functions, refer to the help system of the relevant software (some Instruction Manual” (= 173) for details. Basic Guide In Windows 7, if the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ] icon in the software excluded). • taskbar. Advanced Guide • If CameraWindow is not displayed when using a Macintosh computer, click the 1 Display CameraWindow. [CameraWindow] icon in the Dock. 1 Camera Basics zz In Windows, access CameraWindow by • Although you can save images to a computer simply by connecting your camera to the computer without using the software, the following limitations Auto Mode / clicking [Downloads Images From Canon 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Camera]. apply. - It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the computer until Other Shooting zz 3 Modes On a Macintosh computer, camera images are accessible. CameraWindow is automatically - Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal orientation. 4 P Mode displayed when a Wi-Fi connection is - RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images) may not be established between the camera and Tv, Av, M, and saved. 5 C Mode computer. - Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved to a computer. Playback Mode 2 Import images. - Some problems may occur when saving images or image information, 6 zz depending on the operating system version, the software in use, or image Click [Import Images from Camera], and file sizes. 7 Wi-Fi Functions then click [Import Untransferred Images]. - Some functions provided by the software may not be available, such as Setting Menu zz Images are now saved to the Pictures movie editing. 8 folder on the computer, in separate Accessories folders named by date. 9 zz Click [OK] in the screen that is displayed 10 Appendix after image import is complete. For instructions on viewing images on a Index computer, refer to “Software Instruction Manual” (= 173).

150 Cover Sending Images Automatically 3 Choose the type of images to send (only when sending Before Use (Image Sync) movies with images). Common Camera Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can be zz Press the button, and then Operations sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [3] tab Basic Guide Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services. (= 25). zz Press the

buttons to choose Advanced Guide Initial Preparations [Image Sync], and then press the buttons to choose [Stills/ Camera Basics Install and configure the software on the destination computer. 1 Movies]. Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode 1 Install the software. • To choose a Web service as the destination, follow the steps in “Registering Other Shooting zz Install the software on a computer Other Web Services” (= 136) to update the camera settings. 3 Modes connected to the Internet (= 137). 4 P Mode 2 Register the camera. Tv, Av, M, and zz Windows: In the taskbar, right-click [ ], 5 C Mode and then click [Add new camera]. 6 Playback Mode zz Macintosh: In the menu bar, click [ ], and then click [Register Camera]. 7 Wi-Fi Functions zz Choose a source camera from one of the cameras listed, which are linked to 8 Setting Menu CANON iMAGE GATEWAY (= 134). Accessories zz Once the camera is registered and ready 9 to receive images, the icon changes to 10 Appendix [ ]. Index

151 Cover Sending Images • Even if images were imported to the computer through a different method, any Before Use Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer. images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY will be sent to the computer. Common Camera If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images Operations will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server. Stored • Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same network images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer and as the camera, because images are sent via the access point instead of Basic Guide save the images. CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so the computer must be connected to the Advanced Guide zz Follow the steps in “Connecting to WPS- Internet. Compatible Access Points” (= 141) to 1 Camera Basics choose [ ]. Auto Mode / zz Once the connection is established, the 2 Hybrid Auto Mode images are sent. Other Shooting 3 Modes zz When the images have been sent successfully to the CANON iMAGE 4 P Mode GATEWAY server, [ ] is displayed on Tv, Av, M, and the screen. 5 C Mode

zz Images are automatically saved to the Playback Mode computer when you turn it on. 6 zz Images are automatically sent to Web 7 Wi-Fi Functions services from the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server, even if the computer 8 Setting Menu is off. 9 Accessories

• When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery pack Appendix or an AC adapter kit (sold separately, = 168). 10 Index

152 Cover Geotagging Images on the Camera Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings Before Use GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated CameraWindow Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows. Common Camera application (= 136) can be added to images on the camera. Images are Operations tagged with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation. Editing Connection Information Basic Guide • Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home time 1 Access the Wi-Fi menu Advanced Guide zone are set correctly. (See “Setting the Date and Time” (= 15).) (= 139). Additionally, in [Time Zone] (= 158), specify any shooting Camera Basics destinations that are in other time zones. 2 Choose a device to edit. 1 • The smartphone you will use for geotagging must be authorized to zz Press the

buttons 2 Auto Mode / view the images on the camera (= 145). or turn the <7> dial to choose the icon Hybrid Auto Mode • Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data of the device to edit, and then press the Other Shooting 3 Modes in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing button. these images with others, as when posting images online where 4 P Mode many others can view them. Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode 3 Choose [Edit a Device]. Playback Mode zz Press the

buttons or turn the 6 <7> dial to choose [Edit a Device], and Wi-Fi Functions then press the button. 7 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 4 Choose a device to edit. 10 Appendix zz Press the

buttons or turn the Index <7> dial to choose the device to edit, and then press the button.

153 Cover 5 Choose an item to edit. Erasing Connection Information Before Use zz Press the

buttons or turn the Erase connection information (information about devices that you have <7> dial to choose an item to edit, and Common Camera connected to) as follows. Operations then press the button. zz The items you can change depend on Basic Guide zz Following step 5 in “Editing Connection what device or service the camera will Information” (= 154), choose [Erase access. Advanced Guide Connection Info] and press the Connection button. 1 Camera Basics Configurable Items Web 4 c zz After [Erase?] is displayed, press the Auto Mode / Services 2 Hybrid Auto Mode buttons or turn the <7> dial to [Change Device Nickname] (= 154) OOOO – Other Shooting choose [OK], and then press the 3 Modes [View Settings] (= 145) – O ––– button. zz The connection information will be 4 P Mode [Erase Connection Info] (= 154) OOOO – erased. Tv, Av, M, and O : Configurable – : Not configurable 5 C Mode 6 Playback Mode

Changing a Device Nickname Wi-Fi Functions You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on 7 the camera. 8 Setting Menu

zz Following step 5 in “Editing Connection 9 Accessories Information” (= 154), choose [Change Appendix Device Nickname] and press the 10 button. Index zz Select the input field and press the button. Use the keyboard displayed to enter a new nickname (= 27).

154 Cover Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default Before Use Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the camera Common Camera to another person, or dispose of it. Operations Basic Guide 1 Choose [Wi-Fi Settings]. zz Press the button, and then Advanced Guide choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [3] tab (= 25). 1 Camera Basics Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting 3 Modes 2 Choose [Reset Settings]. P Mode zz Press the

buttons or turn the 4 <7> dial to choose [Reset Settings], and Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode then press the button. 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 3 Restore the default settings. 8 Setting Menu zz Press the buttons or turn the Accessories <7> dial to choose [OK], and then press 9 the button. 10 Appendix zz The Wi-Fi settings are now reset. Index

• Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be sure that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option. • To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose [Reset All] in the [3] tab (= 165).

155 Cover

Before Use

Common Camera Operations 8 Setting Menu Basic Guide Customize or adjust basic camera functions for greater convenience Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting 3 Modes 4 P Mode Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode Adjusting Basic Camera Functions...... 157 Power-Saving Adjustment...... 159 Increasing Touch-Screen Panel Sensitivity...... 163 Silencing Camera Operations...... 157 Screen Brightness...... 160 Setting Copyright Information to Record in 6 Playback Mode Adjusting the Volume...... 157 Start-up Screen...... 160 Images...... 163 Customizing Sounds...... 157 Formatting Memory Cards...... 160 Checking Certification Logos...... 164 7 Wi-Fi Functions Hiding Hints and Tips...... 158 File Numbering...... 161 Display Language...... 164 Date-Based Image Storage...... 162 Adjusting Other Settings...... 164 Date and Time...... 158 Setting Menu World Clock...... 158 Metric / Non-Metric Display...... 162 Restoring Defaults...... 165 8 Electronic Level Calibration...... 162 Lens Retraction Timing...... 159 Accessories Using Eco Mode...... 159 Deactivating Touch-Screen Operations...... 163 9 10 Appendix

Index

156 Cover Adjusting Basic Camera Functions Adjusting the Volume Before Use Functions can be configured on the [3] tab. Customize commonly used Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows. Common Camera functions as desired, for greater convenience (= 25). Operations zz Choose [Volume], and then press the Basic Guide Silencing Camera Operations button. Silence camera sounds and movies as follows. zz Choose an item, and then press the Advanced Guide buttons to adjust the volume. Camera Basics zz Choose [Mute], and then choose [On]. 1 Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting 3 Modes Customizing Sounds P Mode Customize camera operating sounds as follows. 4 Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode • Operation can also be silenced by holding down the

button as you turn zz Choose [Sound Options], and then press the camera on. the button. 6 Playback Mode • Sound is not played during movies (= 104) if you mute camera sounds. To zz Choose an item, and then press the restore sound during movies, press the button or drag up across the 7 Wi-Fi Functions screen. Adjust volume as needed by pressing the

buttons or by buttons to choose an option. dragging up or down. 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories The shutter sound in digest movies recorded in [ ] mode ( 32) cannot • = Appendix be changed. 10 Index

157 Cover Hiding Hints and Tips World Clock Before Use Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose FUNC. (= 24) or To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when you Common Camera MENU (= 25) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information. travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to that Operations time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the Date/ Basic Guide zz Choose [Hints & Tips], and then choose Time setting manually. Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your [Off]. home time zone, as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (= 15). Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics 1 Specify your destination. zz Auto Mode / Choose [Time Zone], and then press the 2 Hybrid Auto Mode button. Other Shooting zz Press the

buttons or turn the 3 Modes <7> dial to choose [ World], and then Date and Time P Mode press the button. 4 Adjust the date and time as follows. zz Press the buttons or turn the Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode <7> dial to choose the destination. zz Choose [Date/Time], and then press the zz To set daylight saving time (1 hour 6 Playback Mode button. ahead), press the

buttons to Wi-Fi Functions zz Press the buttons to choose an choose [ ]. 7 zz option, and then adjust the setting, either Press the button. 8 Setting Menu by pressing the

buttons or 2 Switch to the destination time turning the <7> dial. Accessories zone. 9 zz Press the

buttons or turn the 10 Appendix <7> dial to choose [ World], and then press the button. Index zz [ ] is now shown on the shooting screen (= 191).

• Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (= 16) will automatically update your [ Home] time and date.

158 Cover Lens Retraction Timing 2 Shoot. zz To activate the screen and prepare for Before Use The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press shooting when the screen is off but the Common Camera the <1> button in Shooting mode (= 22). To have the lens retracted lens is still out, press the shutter button Operations immediately after you press the <1> button, set the retraction timing to halfway. [0 sec.]. Basic Guide Power-Saving Adjustment Advanced Guide zz Choose [Lens Retract], and then choose [0 sec.]. Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto Power Camera Basics Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (= 22). 1 Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz Choose [Power Saving], and then press Other Shooting the button. 3 Modes zz After choosing an item, press the P Mode buttons to adjust it as needed. 4 Tv, Av, M, and Using Eco Mode 5 C Mode

This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode. When Playback Mode the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce battery 6 consumption. • To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for Wi-Fi Functions [Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off]. 7 1 Configure the setting. 8 Setting Menu • The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power Down] to [Off]. zz Choose [Eco Mode], and then choose • These power-saving functions are not available when you have set Eco mode 9 Accessories [On]. (= 159) to [On]. zz [ ] is now shown on the shooting 10 Appendix screen (= 191). zz The screen darkens when the camera Index is not used for approximately two seconds; approximately ten seconds after darkening, the screen turns off. The camera turns off after approximately three minutes of inactivity. 159 Cover Screen Brightness Formatting Memory Cards Before Use Adjust screen brightness as follows. Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device, you Common Camera should format the card with this camera. Operations zz Choose [LCD Brightness], and then Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up. Basic Guide press the buttons to adjust the brightness. Advanced Guide 1 Access the [Format] screen. zz Choose [Format], and then press the 1 Camera Basics button. 2 Auto Mode / 2 Choose [OK]. Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting • For maximum brightness, press and hold the

button for at least one zz Press the

buttons to choose 3 Modes second when the shooting screen is displayed or when in single-image display. [Cancel], choose [OK] (either press the (This will override the [LCD Brightness] setting on the [3] tab.) To restore buttons or turn the <7> dial), 4 P Mode the original brightness, press and hold the

button again for at least one and then press the button. second or restart the camera. Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode 6 Playback Mode Start-up Screen 3 Format the memory card. Wi-Fi Functions Customize the start-up screen shown after you turn the camera on as zz To begin the formatting process, press 7 follows. the

buttons or turn the <7> 8 Setting Menu dial to choose [OK], and then press the zz Choose [Start-up Image], and then press button. 9 Accessories the button. zz When formatting is finished, [Memory Appendix zz Press the buttons or turn the card formatting complete] is displayed. 10 Press the button. <7> dial to choose an option. Index

• Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes file management information on the card and does not erase the data completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards, take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by physically destroying cards. 160 Cover File Numbering • The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be less than Before Use the advertised capacity. Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999) Common Camera and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change Operations Low-Level Formatting how the camera assigns file numbers. Perform low-level formatting in these cases: [Memory card error] is Basic Guide displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing is zz Choose [File Numbering], and then Advanced Guide slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly stops. choose an option. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-level Camera Basics formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take other 1 steps to back them up. Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting zz On the screen in step 1 of “Formatting 3 Modes Memory Cards” (= 160), press the Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th shot is taken/ P Mode

buttons or turn the <7> dial Continuous 4 saved) even if you switch memory cards. to choose [Low Level Format], and then Tv, Av, M, and Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch memory cards, or press the buttons to select this Auto Reset 5 C Mode when a new folder is created. option. A [ ] icon is displayed. 6 Playback Mode zz Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Formatting Memory Cards” (= 160) to continue with the • Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be numbered 7 Wi-Fi Functions formatting process. consecutively after the last number of existing images on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001, use an empty (or formatted 8 Setting Menu (= 160)) memory card. • Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory Cards” (= 160), • Refer to “Software Instruction Manual” (= 173) for information on the card Accessories because data is erased from all storage regions of the memory card. 9 folder structure and image formats. • You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing [Stop]. In this Appendix case, all data will be erased, but the memory card can be used normally. 10 Index

161 Cover Date-Based Image Storage Electronic Level Calibration Before Use Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the Common Camera camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day. camera. Operations For greater calibration accuracy, display grid lines (= 98) to help you Basic Guide zz Choose [Create Folder], and then choose level the camera in advance. [Daily]. Advanced Guide zz Images will now be saved in folders 1 Make sure the camera is level. created on the shooting date. zz Place the camera on a flat surface, such 1 Camera Basics as a table. 2 Auto Mode / 2 Calibrate the electronic level. Hybrid Auto Mode zz Other Shooting Choose [Electronic Level], and then press 3 Modes Metric / Non-Metric Display the button. zz Choose [Calibrate] and press the 4 P Mode Change the unit of measurement shown in the zoom bar (= 30), the MF button. A confirmation message is Tv, Av, M, and indicator (= 80), GPS information for elevation (= 153), and elsewhere displayed. 5 C Mode from m/cm to ft/in as needed. zz Choose [OK], and then press the 6 Playback Mode button. zz Choose [Units], and then choose [ft/in]. 7 Wi-Fi Functions

Resetting the Electronic Level Setting Menu Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is 8 not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level. 9 Accessories zz Choose [Electronic Level], and then press 10 Appendix the button. Index zz Choose [Reset], and then press the button. zz Once the electronic level has been reset, the menu screen is displayed again.

162 Cover Deactivating Touch-Screen Operations Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images Before Use The touch-screen can be disabled to prevent unintended touch operations. To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this Common Camera information beforehand as follows. Operations zz Choose [Touch Operation], and then Basic Guide choose [Off]. zz Choose [Copyright Info], and then press the button. Advanced Guide zz Press the

buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose [Enter Author’s 1 Camera Basics Name] or [Enter Copyright Details]. Press Auto Mode / the button to access the keyboard, 2 Hybrid Auto Mode and enter the name (= 27). Other Shooting Increasing Touch-Screen Panel Sensitivity zz Press the button. When [Accept 3 Modes Sensitivity of the touch-screen panel can be increased, so that the camera changes?] is displayed, choose [Yes] 4 P Mode (either press the buttons or turn responds to a lighter touch. Tv, Av, M, and the <7> dial), and then press the 5 C Mode button. zz Choose [Touch Response], and then zz The information set here will now be 6 Playback Mode choose [High]. recorded in images. 7 Wi-Fi Functions

• To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info] on the Setting Menu screen above, and then press the button. 8 • You can also use the software (= 173) to enter, change, and delete copyright Accessories information. Some characters entered with the software may not display on the 9 camera, but will be correctly recorded in images. 10 Appendix • You can check copyright information recorded in images by using the software, once you save the images to a computer. Index

163 Cover Display Language Deleting All Copyright Information Before Use You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same Change the display language as needed. Common Camera time as follows. Operations zz Choose [Language ], and then press Basic Guide zz Follow the steps in “Setting Copyright the button. Information to Record in Images” zz Press the

buttons or Advanced Guide (= 163) and choose [Delete Copyright turn the <7> dial to choose a language, Info]. and then press the button. 1 Camera Basics zz Press the buttons or turn the Auto Mode / <7> dial to choose [OK], and then press 2 Hybrid Auto Mode the button. Other Shooting You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by pressing and • 3 Modes holding the button and immediately pressing the button. • The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted. 4 P Mode Adjusting Other Settings Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode Checking Certification Logos The following settings can also be adjusted on the [3] tab. • [Video System] (= 172) 6 Playback Mode Some logos for certification requirements met by the camera can be viewed [Ctrl via HDMI] ( 170) on the screen. Other certification logos are printed in this guide, on the • = 7 Wi-Fi Functions camera packaging, or on the camera body. • [Wi-Fi Settings] (= 130) 8 Setting Menu zz Choose [Certification Logo Display], and Accessories then press the button. 9 10 Appendix

Index

164 Cover Restoring Defaults Before Use If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera Common Camera settings. Operations Basic Guide 1 Access the [Reset All] screen. zz Choose [Reset All], and then press the Advanced Guide button. Camera Basics 2 Restore default settings. 1 zz Press the buttons or turn the Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode <7> dial to choose [OK], and then press Other Shooting the button. 3 Modes zz Default settings are now restored. 4 P Mode • The following functions are not restored to default settings. Tv, Av, M, and - Information registered using Face ID (= 41) 5 C Mode - [3] tab settings [Date/Time] (= 158), [Time Zone] (= 158) [Language ] 6 Playback Mode (= 164), and [Video System] (= 171) - Custom white balance data you have recorded (= 76) 7 Wi-Fi Functions - Shooting mode chosen in [K] (= 54) or [ ] (= 56) mode - Movie mode (= 67) 8 Setting Menu - Wi-Fi settings (= 130) - Calibrated value for the electronic level (= 162) 9 Accessories - Copyright information (= 163) 10 Appendix

Index

165 Cover

Before Use

Common Camera Operations 9 Accessories Basic Guide Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon accessories and other compatible Advanced Guide accessories sold separately 1 Camera Basics Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting 3 Modes 4 P Mode Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode System Map...... 167 Using Optional Accessories...... 169 Printing Images...... 176 Optional Accessories...... 168 Playback on a TV...... 169 Easy Print...... 176 6 Playback Mode Power Supplies...... 168 Powering the Camera with Household Power...... 172 Configuring Print Settings...... 177 Flash Unit...... 168 Using the Software...... 173 Printing Movie Scenes...... 179 7 Wi-Fi Functions Other Accessories...... 168 Software...... 173 Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)...... 180 Printers...... 169 Computer Connections via a Cable...... 173 Adding Images to a Photobook...... 182 8 Setting Menu Saving Images to a Computer...... 174 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

166 Cover System Map Before Use Flash Unit Included Accessories Common Camera Operations

Battery Pack Battery Charger Basic Guide NB‑6LH*1 CB‑2LY/CB‑2LYE*1 Wrist Strap High-Power Flash Advanced Guide HF-DC2 1 Camera Basics Case Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting USB Cable (camera end: Mini-B)*2 3 Modes Waterproof Case WP-DC51 4 P Mode Tv, Av, M, and Power Memory Card Card Reader Windows/ Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible Printers 5 C Mode Macintosh Cables Computer 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions HDMI Cable HTC-100 AC Adapter Kit Setting Menu ACK-DC40 8 TV/Video System Accessories Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST 9 Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended. Appendix This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine 10 *1 Also available for purchase separately. Canon accessories. Index *2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-400PCU). Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may request such repairs on a chargeable basis. Note that availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be available. 167 Cover Optional Accessories Flash Unit Before Use The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that availability High-Power Flash HF-DC2 Common Camera varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be available. Operations zz External flash for illuminating subjects Power Supplies that are out of range of the built-in flash. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Battery Pack NB-6LH Other Accessories zz Rechargeable lithium-ion battery 1 Camera Basics Battery Charger Auto Mode / Waterproof Case WP-DC51 CB-2LY/CB-2LYE 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz For underwater photography at depths of zz Charger for Battery Pack NB-6LH Other Shooting up to 40 meters (130 ft.). Also useful for 3 Modes shooting in the rain, at the beach, or on AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC40 4 P Mode zz For powering the camera using ski slopes. Tv, Av, M, and household power. Recommended when Interface Cable IFC‑400PCU 5 C Mode using the camera over extended periods, zz For connecting the camera to a computer or when connecting the camera to a 6 Playback Mode or printer. printer or computer. Cannot be used to Wi-Fi Functions charge the battery pack in the camera. 7 8 Setting Menu • The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can attach to know Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST zz Connect the camera to a TV to enjoy the charging status at a glance. Attach the cover so that  is visible on a 9 Accessories charged battery pack, and attach it so that  is not visible on an uncharged playback on the larger TV screen. battery pack. 10 Appendix • Battery Pack NB-6L is also supported. HDMI Cable HTC-100 Index zz For connecting the camera to an HDMI input of a high-definition TV.

168 Cover Printers Still Images Movies Using Optional Accessories Before Use Canon-Brand PictBridge- Common Camera Operations Compatible Printers Still Images Movies zz Printing images without a computer is Playback on a TV Basic Guide possible by connecting the camera to By connecting the camera to a TV, you can view your shots on the larger Advanced Guide a Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible screen of the TV. printer. For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual. Camera Basics For details, visit your nearest Canon 1 Auto Mode / retailer. • Some information may not be displayed on the TV (= 192). 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting 3 Modes Still Images Movies 4 P Mode Playback on a High-Definition TV Connecting the camera to an HDTV with the HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the TV. Movies shot at a resolution of [ ], [ ], or [ ] can be viewed in 6 Playback Mode high definition. 7 Wi-Fi Functions

1 Make sure the camera and TV Setting Menu are off. 8 2 Connect the camera to the TV. 9 Accessories zz On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into 10 Appendix the HDMI input as shown. Index

169 Cover Still Images Movies zz On the camera, open the terminal cover Before Use and insert the cable plug fully into the Controlling the Camera with a TV Remote camera terminal. Connecting the camera to an HDMI CEC-compatible TV enables playback Common Camera Operations (including slideshow playback) using the TV remote control. Depending on the TV, you may need to adjust some TV settings. For Basic Guide details, refer to the TV manual. Advanced Guide 1 Configure the setting. 1 Camera Basics zz Press the button, choose 3 Turn the TV on and switch to [Ctrl via HDMI] on the [ ] tab, and then Auto Mode / 3 2 Hybrid Auto Mode video input. choose [Enable] (= 25). zz Switch the TV input to the video input you Other Shooting 3 Modes connected the cable to in step 2. 2 Connect the camera to the TV. zz Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Playback on a 4 P Mode 4 Turn the camera on. High-Definition TV” (= 169) to connect zz Press the <1> button to turn the camera Tv, Av, M, and the camera to the TV. 5 C Mode on. zz Images from the camera are now 3 Display images. 6 Playback Mode displayed on the TV. (Nothing is zz Turn on the TV. On the camera, press the Wi-Fi Functions displayed on the camera screen.) <1> button. 7 zz Images from the camera are now zz When finished, turn off the camera and 8 Setting Menu TV before disconnecting the cable. displayed on the TV. (Nothing is displayed on the camera screen.) 9 Accessories • Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is 4 Control the camera with the TV Appendix connected to a television. remote. 10 zz Press the buttons on the remote Index • Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is connected to an to browse images. HDTV. zz To display the camera control panel, press the OK/Select button. Select control panel options by pressing the buttons to choose an option, and then pressing the OK/Select button again. 170 Cover

Camera Control Panel Options Shown on the TV Still Images Movies Before Use Return Closes the menu. Playback on a Standard-Definition TV Common Camera Operations Displays sets of images, either from continuous Connecting the camera to a TV with the Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST shooting (= 79) in [G], [M], [B], or [D] mode (sold separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the Basic Guide Group Playback (= 69, 94, or 95) or individual still images TV as you control the camera. saved as source data in [ ] mode (= 65). (Only Advanced Guide displayed when a grouped image is selected.) 1 Make sure the camera and TV Starts movie playback. (Only displayed when a movie Camera Basics Play Movie are off. 1 is selected.) Auto Mode / White Red Starts slideshow playback. To switch images during Yellow 2 Connect the camera to the TV. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode . Slideshow playback, press the buttons on the remote Yellow zz On the TV, insert the cable plugs fully into Other Shooting control. the video inputs as shown. 3 Modes Index Playback Displays multiple images in an index. Red 4 P Mode White l Change Display Switches display modes (= 106). Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode zz On the camera, open the terminal cover • Pressing buttons, such as the button, on the camera will switch 6 Playback Mode and insert the cable plug fully into the control to the camera itself, which will prevent remote control until you return to single-image display. camera terminal. 7 Wi-Fi Functions • Moving the zoom lever on the camera will switch control to the camera itself, which will prevent remote control until you return to single-image display. 8 Setting Menu • The camera may not always respond correctly even if the remote is for an HDMI CEC-compatible TV. 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

3 Display images. Index zz Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Playback on a High-Definition TV” (= 170) to display images.

171 Cover 3 Connect the adapter to the • Correct display is not possible unless the camera video output Before Use format (NTSC or PAL) matches the TV format. To change the coupler. zz Open the cover and insert the adapter Common Camera video output format, press the button and choose [Video Operations System] on the [3] tab. plug fully into the coupler. • Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is Basic Guide connected to a television. Advanced Guide • When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot while previewing 4 Connect the power cord. shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot, follow the same steps as when zz Insert one end of the power cord into the 1 Camera Basics using the camera screen. However, AF-Point Zoom (= 49), MF-Point compact power adapter, and then plug Auto Mode / Zoom (= 81), MF Peaking (= 81) and Night Display (= 92) are not the other end into a power outlet. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode available. zz Turn the camera on and use it as desired. 3 Other Shooting zz When finished, turn the camera off and Modes Still Images Movies unplug the power cord from the outlet. 4 P Mode Powering the Camera with Household Power Tv, Av, M, and Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC40 (sold separately) • Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while 5 C Mode eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level. the camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the camera. 6 Playback Mode • Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing so Wi-Fi Functions 1 Make sure the camera is off. could result in malfunction or damage to the product. 7 2 Insert the coupler. 8 Setting Menu zz Follow step 2 in “Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card” (= 13) to 9 Accessories open the cover. Appendix zz Insert the coupler facing the direction 10 shown, just as you would a battery pack Index Terminals (following step 3 in “Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card” (= 13)). zz Follow step 5 in “Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card” (= 14) to close the cover.

172 Cover Using the Software Computer Connections via a Cable Before Use The software available for download from the Canon website is introduced Common Camera below, with instructions for installation and saving images to a computer. Checking Your Computer Environment Operations The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed system Basic Guide Software requirements and compatibility information, including support in new operating systems, visit the Canon website. After downloading the software from the Canon website and installing it, you Advanced Guide can do the following things on your computer. Windows Macintosh Windows 8 Camera Basics Operating Mac OS X 10.6 1 Windows 7 SP1 CameraWindow System* Mac OS X 10.7 Auto Mode / Windows Vista SP2 zz Import images and change camera settings Mac OS X 10.8 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Windows XP SP3 ImageBrowser EX 3 Other Shooting zz Manage images: view, search, and organize * When sending images to a computer via Wi-Fi, check the system requirements in Modes “Checking Your Computer Environment” (= 137). zz Print and edit images 4 P Mode Digital Photo Professional • Check the Canon website for the latest system requirements, including Tv, Av, M, and zz Browse, process and edit RAW images supported OS versions. 5 C Mode 6 Playback Mode • Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and Installing the Software access fees must be paid separately. For software installation instructions, see “Installing the Software” (= 137). 7 Wi-Fi Functions Software Instruction Manual 8 Setting Menu Refer to the instruction manual when using the software. The manual can Accessories be accessed from the help system of software (some software excluded). 9 10 Appendix

Index

173 Cover Saving Images to a Computer 2 Turn the camera on to access Before Use Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration. CameraWindow. zz Press the <1> button to turn the camera Common Camera For other functions, refer to the help system of the relevant software (some Operations software excluded). on. zz On a Macintosh computer, Basic Guide CameraWindow is displayed when a 1 Connect the camera to the Advanced Guide computer. connection is established between the camera and computer. zz With the camera turned off, open the 1 Camera Basics cover ( ). With the smaller plug of the zz For Windows, follow the steps introduced Auto Mode / USB cable in the orientation shown, below. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode insert the plug fully into the camera zz In the screen that displays, click the [ ] Other Shooting terminal ( ). link to modify the program. 3 Modes P Mode zz Choose [Downloads Images From Canon 4 Camera] and then click [OK]. Tv, Av, M, and zz Insert the larger plug of the USB cable 5 C Mode in the computer’s USB port. For details Playback Mode about USB connections on the computer, 6 refer to the computer user manual. 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu zz Double-click [ ]. 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

174 Cover CameraWindow 3 Save the images to the • In Windows 7, if the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ] icon in the Before Use computer. taskbar. zz Click [Import Images from Camera], and • To start CameraWindow in Windows Vista or XP, click [Downloads Images Common Camera Operations then click [Import Untransferred Images]. From Canon Camera] on the screen displayed when you turn the camera on zz Images are now saved to the Pictures in step 2. If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the [Start] menu and choose Basic Guide folder on the computer, in separate [All Programs] ► [Canon Utilities] ► [CameraWindow] ► [CameraWindow]. • On a Macintosh computer, if CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click folders named by date. Advanced Guide the [CameraWindow] icon in the Dock (the bar at the bottom of the desktop). zz After images are saved, close • Although you can save images to a computer simply by connecting your 1 Camera Basics CameraWindow, press the <1> button camera to the computer without using the software, the following limitations to turn the camera off, and unplug the apply. Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode cable. - It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the computer until camera images are accessible. Other Shooting zz For instructions on viewing images on a 3 Modes computer, refer to “Software Instruction - Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal orientation. Manual” (= 173). - RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images) may not be 4 P Mode saved. Tv, Av, M, and - Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved to a computer. 5 C Mode - Some problems may occur when saving images or image information, depending on the operating system version, the software in use, or image 6 Playback Mode file sizes. Wi-Fi Functions - Some functions provided by the software may not be available, such as 7 movie editing. 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

175 Cover Still Images Movies 3 Turn the printer on. Before Use Printing Images 4 Turn the camera on. zz Press the < > button to turn the camera Common Camera Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer. On 1 Operations the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare orders on. for photo development services, and prepare orders or print images for Basic Guide photobooks. A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the 5 Choose an image. Advanced Guide sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by zz Press the buttons or turn the Camera Basics printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information. <7> dial to choose an image. 1 Auto Mode / 6 Access the printing screen. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Still Images zz Press the button. Other Shooting Easy Print 3 Modes 7 Print the image. Easily print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible zz Press the

buttons or turn the 4 P Mode printer (sold separately) with the USB cable. <7> dial to choose [Print], and then Tv, Av, M, and press the button. 5 C Mode 1 Make sure the camera and zz Printing now begins. 6 Playback Mode printer are off. zz To print other images, repeat the above 2 Connect the camera to the procedures starting from step 5 after 7 Wi-Fi Functions printer. printing is finished. Setting Menu zz Open the cover. Holding the smaller zz When you are finished printing, turn the 8 camera and printer off and disconnect cable plug in the orientation shown, insert 9 Accessories the plug fully into the camera terminal. the cable. zz Connect the larger cable plug to the 10 Appendix printer. For other connection details, refer • For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately), see to the printer manual. “Printers” (= 169). Index • RAW images cannot be printed.

176 Cover Still Images Configuring Print Settings Still Images Before Use Cropping Images before Printing Common Camera 1 Access the printing screen. By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area Operations zz Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print” instead of the entire image. Basic Guide (= 176) to access the screen at left. Advanced Guide 2 Configure the settings. 1 Choose [Cropping]. zz After following step 1 in “Configuring Print zz Press the

buttons or turn 1 Camera Basics the <7> dial to choose an item, and Settings” (= 177) to access the printing screen, choose [Cropping] and press the Auto Mode / then choose an option by pressing the 2 Hybrid Auto Mode button. buttons. Other Shooting zz A cropping frame is now displayed, 3 Modes Default Matches current printer settings. indicating the image area to print. 4 P Mode Date Prints images with the date added. 2 Adjust the cropping frame as File No. Prints images with the file number added. Tv, Av, M, and needed. 5 C Mode Both Prints images with both the date and file number added. zz To resize the frame, move the zoom Playback Mode Off – lever. 6 Default Matches current printer settings. zz To move the frame, press the 7 Wi-Fi Functions Off –

buttons. Uses information from the time of shooting to print under zz To rotate the frame, turn the <7> dial. Setting Menu On 8 optimal settings. zz When finished, press the button. Red-Eye 1 Corrects red-eye. 9 Accessories 3 Print the image. No. of Copies Choose the number of copies to print. zz Follow step 7 in “Easy Print” (= 176) 10 Appendix Cropping – Specify a desired image area to print (= 177). to print. Index Specify the paper size, layout, and other details Paper – Settings (= 178). • Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some aspect ratios. • Dates may not be printed correctly if you crop images shot with [Date Stamp ] selected.

177 Cover Still Images 4 Choose a layout. Before Use Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing zz Press the

buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose an option. Common Camera Operations 1 Choose [Paper Settings]. zz When choosing [N-up], press the zz After following step 1 in “Configuring Print buttons to specify the number of Basic Guide Settings” (= 177) to access the printing images per sheet. screen, choose [Paper Settings] and Advanced Guide zz Press the button. press the button. 5 Print the image. 1 Camera Basics Auto Mode / Available Layout Options 2 Hybrid Auto Mode 2 Choose a paper size. Other Shooting Default Matches current printer settings. zz Press the

buttons or turn the 3 Modes Bordered Prints with blank space around the image. <7> dial to choose an option, and then 4 P Mode press the button. Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing. N-up Choose how many images to print per sheet. Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode Prints images for identification purposes. ID Photo Only available for images with a resolution of L and an aspect ratio of 6 Playback Mode 4:3. Choose the print size. Wi-Fi Functions 3 Choose a type of paper. Fixed Size 7 zz Press the

buttons or turn the Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints. Setting Menu <7> dial to choose an option, and then 8 press the < > button. m 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

178 Cover Movies Still Images Printing Movie Scenes Before Use Printing ID Photos Common Camera 1 Choose [ID Photo]. 1 Access the printing screen. Operations zz Following steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing zz Follow steps 1 – 5 in “Easy Print” Basic Guide Paper Size and Layout before Printing” (= 176) to choose a movie, and then (= 178), choose [ID Photo] and press press the button. Advanced Guide the button. zz Press the buttons or turn the Camera Basics <7> dial to choose [c], and then press 1 2 Choose the long and short side the button. The screen at left is Auto Mode / length. displayed. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode zz Press the

buttons or turn the Other Shooting <7> dial to choose an item. Choose the 2 Choose a printing method. 3 Modes zz length by pressing the buttons, Press the

buttons or turn 4 P Mode and then press the button. the <7> dial to choose [ ], and then press the buttons to choose the Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode printing method. Playback Mode 3 Choose the printing area. 3 Print the image. 6 zz Follow step 2 in “Cropping Images before Wi-Fi Functions Printing” (= 177) to choose the printing 7 Movie Printing Options area. Setting Menu Single Prints the current scene as a still image. 8 Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single sheet of 9 Accessories Sequence paper. You can also print the folder number, file number, and elapsed 4 Print the image. time for the frame by setting [Caption] to [On]. 10 Appendix

Index • To cancel printing in progress, press the button. • [ID Photo] and [Sequence] cannot be chosen on Canon-brand PictBridge- compatible printers from CP720/CP730 and earlier models.

179 Cover Still Images Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF) • Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the Before Use printer or photo development service, in some cases. Common Camera Batch printing (= 182) and ordering prints from a photo development • [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory Operations service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a card has print settings that were configured on another camera. memory card and configure relevant settings, such as the number of copies, Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all Basic Guide as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will conform to previous settings. DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards. • Setting [Date] to [On] may cause some printers to print the date Advanced Guide twice. Camera Basics • RAW images cannot be included in print list. 1 • Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both [Date] and [File Auto Mode / Still Images No.] at the same time. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode • Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible Other Shooting Configuring Print Settings printers (sold separately). 3 Modes • The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/Time] on the Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or file number, and P Mode other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print list. [3] tab (= 15). 4 Tv, Av, M, and Still Images 5 C Mode zz Press the button, and then Playback Mode choose [Print Settings] on the [2] tab. Setting Up Printing for Individual Images 6 Choose and configure items as desired Wi-Fi Functions (= 25). 1 Choose [Select Images & Qty.]. 7 zz Press the button, choose Setting Menu [Select Images & Qty.] on the [2] tab, 8 and then press the button. 9 Accessories Standard One image is printed per sheet. Print Type Index Smaller versions of multiple images are printed per sheet. 10 Appendix Both Both standard and index formats are printed. Index On Images are printed with the shooting date. Date Off – On Images are printed with the file number. File No. Off – Clear DPOF On All image print list settings are cleared after printing. data Off – 180 Cover 2 Choose an image. Still Images zz Press the buttons or turn the Before Use Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images <7> dial to choose an image, and then Common Camera press the button. zz Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing Operations zz You can now specify the number of for Individual Images” (= 180), choose Basic Guide copies. [Select Range] and press the zz If you specify index printing for the image, button. Advanced Guide it is labeled with a [ ] icon. To cancel zz Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range” index printing for the image, press the (= 117) to specify images. 1 Camera Basics button again. [ ] is no longer zz Press the

buttons to choose Auto Mode / displayed. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode [Order], and then press the button. Other Shooting 3 Specify the number of prints. 3 Modes zz Press the

buttons or turn the Still Images P Mode <7> dial to specify the number of prints 4 (up to 99). Setting Up Printing for All Images Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode zz To set up printing for other images and zz Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing specify the number of prints, repeat steps for Individual Images” (= 180), choose 6 Playback Mode 2 – 3. [Select All Images] and press the zz Printing quantity cannot be specified for button. 7 Wi-Fi Functions index prints. You can only choose which zz Press the buttons or turn the Setting Menu images to print, by following step 2. <7> dial to choose [OK], and then press 8 zz When finished, press the button the button. 9 Accessories to return to the menu screen. 10 Appendix

Index

181 Cover Still Images Still Images Adding Images to a Photobook Before Use Clearing All Images from the Print List Common Camera Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images zz Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing Operations on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer, for Individual Images” (= 180), choose where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient when ordering Basic Guide [Clear All Selections] and press the printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own printer. button. Advanced Guide zz Press the buttons or turn the Choosing a Selection Method <7> dial to choose [OK], and then press 1 Camera Basics the button. zz Press the button, choose Auto Mode / [Photobook Set-up] on the [1] tab, and 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Still Images then choose how you will select images. Other Shooting 3 Modes Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF) 4 P Mode zz When images have been added to the Tv, Av, M, and print list (= 180 – 181), the screen 5 C Mode at left is displayed after you connect • [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory 6 Playback Mode the camera to a PictBridge-compatible card has print settings that were configured on another camera. printer. Press the

buttons to Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all 7 Wi-Fi Functions choose [Print now], and then simply press previous settings. the button to print the images in the 8 Setting Menu print list. • After importing images to your computer, also refer to “Software Instruction zz Any DPOF print job that you temporarily Manual” (= 173) and the printer manual for further information. 9 Accessories stop will be resumed from the next image. 10 Appendix

Index

182 Cover Still Images Still Images Before Use Adding Images Individually Adding All Images to a Photobook Common Camera 1 Choose [Select]. Operations zz Following the procedure in “Adding zz Following the procedure in “Choosing Basic Guide a Selection Method” (= 182), choose Images Individually” (= 183), choose [Select] and press the button. [Select All Images] and press the Advanced Guide button. zz Press the buttons or turn the 1 Camera Basics <7> dial to choose [OK], and then press Auto Mode / the button. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode 2 Choose an image. Other Shooting zz Press the buttons or turn the Still Images 3 Modes <7> dial to choose an image, and then 4 P Mode press the button. Removing All Images from a Photobook Tv, Av, M, and zz [ ] is displayed. zz Following the procedure in “Adding 5 C Mode zz To remove the image from the photobook, Images Individually” (= 183), choose press the button again. [ ] is no [Clear All Selections] and press the 6 Playback Mode longer displayed. button. Wi-Fi Functions zz Repeat this process to specify other zz Press the buttons or turn the 7 images. <7> dial to choose [OK], and then press 8 Setting Menu zz When finished, press the button the button. to return to the menu screen. 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

183 Cover

Before Use

Common Camera Operations 10 Appendix Basic Guide Helpful information when using the camera Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting 3 Modes 4 P Mode Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode Troubleshooting...... 185 Functions and Menu Tables...... 193 1 Playback Tab Menu...... 203 On-Screen Messages...... 188 Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode...... 193 2 Print Tab Menu...... 203 6 Playback Mode FUNC. Menu...... 195 Handling Precautions...... 204 On-Screen Information...... 191 4 Shooting Tab Menu...... 198 Specifications...... 204 7 Wi-Fi Functions Shooting (Information Display)...... 191 3 Set Up Tab Menu...... 203 Playback (Detailed Information Display)...... 192 My Menu Tab Menu...... 203 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

184 Cover Troubleshooting Strange display on the screen under low light (= 24). Strange display on the screen when shooting. Before Use If you think there is a problem with the camera, first check the following. Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are Common Camera If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer recorded in movies. Operations Support Help Desk. • The screen may flicker under fluorescent or LED lighting. Basic Guide Power No date stamp is added to images. Nothing happens when the power button is pressed. • Configure the [Date Stamp ] setting (= 40). Note that date stamps are not Advanced Guide added to images automatically, merely because you have configured the [Date/Time] • Confirm that the battery pack is charged (= 12). setting (= 15). Camera Basics • Confirm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (= 13). 1 • Date stamps are not added in shooting modes (= 202) in which this setting cannot Auto Mode / • Confirm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (= 14). be configured (= 40). 2 Hybrid Auto Mode • Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals with a [h] flashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times. Other Shooting shooting is not possible (= 33). 3 Modes The battery pack runs out of power quickly. [ ] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (= 33). P Mode • Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery pack a 4 • Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] (= 91). little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals do not touch Tv, Av, M, and any metal objects. • Raise the flash and set the flash mode to [h] (= 87). 5 C Mode • If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon after • Increase the ISO speed (= 72). Playback Mode charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack. • Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. In this case, you 6 should set [IS Mode] to [Off] (= 91). The lens is not retracted. 7 Wi-Fi Functions • Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the cover, Shots are out of focus. turn the camera on, and then turn it off again (= 14). • Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the way 8 Setting Menu down to shoot ( 23). The battery pack is swollen. = • Make sure subjects are within focusing range (= 206). Accessories • Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if 9 battery swelling prevents the battery pack from fitting in the camera, contact a Canon • Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] (= 51). Appendix Customer Support Help Desk. • Confirm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated. 10 Display on a TV • Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (= 82, 87). Index Shots are blurry. Camera images look distorted or not displayed on a TV (= 172). • Blurring may occur more often when Touch Shutter is used to shoot, depending on Shooting shooting conditions. Hold the camera still when shooting. Cannot shoot. • In Playback mode (= 103), press the shutter button halfway (= 23). 185 Cover No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the Subjects are affected by red-eye (= 47). shutter button is pressed halfway. • Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (= 51) to activate the red-eye reduction lamp Before Use • To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the (= 3) in flash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye reduction Common Camera shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter button lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at closer range. Operations halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly. • Edit images using red-eye correction (= 127). Basic Guide Subjects in shots look too dark. Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting Raise the flash and set the flash mode to [h] (= 87). • is slower. Advanced Guide • Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (= 70). • Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (= 161). • Adjust contrast by using i-Contrast (= 74, 126). Shooting settings or FUNC. menu settings are not available. 1 Camera Basics • Use AE lock or spot metering (= 71). • Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in Each Auto Mode / Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out. Shooting Mode”, “FUNC. Menu”, and “Shooting Tab Menu” (= 193 – 202). 2 Hybrid Auto Mode • Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [!] (= 31). The Babies or Children icon does not display. Other Shooting 3 Modes • Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (= 70). • The Babies and Children icons will not display if the birthday is not set in face • Use AE lock or spot metering (= 71). information (= 41). If the icons still do not display even when you set the birthday, P Mode re-register face information (= 41), or make sure that the date/time are set 4 • Reduce the lighting on subjects. correctly (= 158). Tv, Av, M, and Shots look too dark despite the flash firing (= 33). 5 C Mode Touch AF/Touch Shutter cannot be activated. • Shoot within flash range (= 206). • Touch AF and Touch Shutter cannot be activated by touching the edges of the screen. 6 Playback Mode • Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash output Try touching closer to the center of the screen. level (= 88, 96). 7 Wi-Fi Functions • Increase the ISO speed (= 72). Cannot shoot planetarium stars well in [ ] mode. • Shoot actual starry skies instead. Setting Menu Subjects in flash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out. 8 • Shoot within flash range (= 206). Shooting Movies 9 Accessories • Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [!] (= 31). The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted. • Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash output • Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports high- 10 Appendix level (= 88, 96). speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the length of White dots or similar image artifacts appear in flash shots. movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time (= 160, 206). Index • This is caused by light from the flash reflecting off dust or airborne particles. [ ] is displayed and shooting stops automatically. The camera’s internal memory buffer filled up as the camera could not record to the Shots look grainy. memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures. • Lower the ISO speed (= 72). • Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (= 161). • High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (= 55). • Lower the image quality (= 48). • Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording (= 206). 186 Cover Zooming is not possible. Computer • Zooming is not possible in [ ] mode (= 64). Cannot transfer images to a computer. Before Use • Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [ ] (= 58) and [ ] (= 67) When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the Common Camera modes. transfer speed as follows. Operations Subjects look distorted. • Press the <1> button to enter Playback mode. Hold the button down as you press the and buttons at the same time. On the next screen, press Basic Guide • Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a the buttons to choose [B], and then press the button. malfunction. Advanced Guide Playback Wi-Fi o 1 Camera Basics Playback is not possible. Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the < > button. • The Wi-Fi menu is not available in Shooting mode. Switch to Playback mode and try Auto Mode / • Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename files or again. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode alter the folder structure. Refer to “Software Instruction Manual” (= 173) for details on folder structure and file names. • In Playback mode, the Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during magnified display or Other Shooting index display. Switch to single-image display and try again. Similarly, the Wi-Fi menu 3 Modes Playback stops, or audio skips. cannot be accessed during group playback or filtered image display according to P Mode • Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the specified conditions. Cancel group or filtered image playback. 4 camera (= 161). • The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer, Tv, Av, M, and • There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards that computer, or TV via a cable. Disconnect the cable. 5 C Mode have slow read speeds. Cannot add a device/destination. Playback Mode • When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may skip 6 • A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase if computer performance is inadequate. unneeded connection information from the camera first, and then add new devices/ 7 Wi-Fi Functions Sound is not played during movies. destinations (= 153). • Adjust the volume (= 104) if you have activated [Mute] (= 157) or the sound in • Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services (= 133). 8 Setting Menu the movie is faint. • To add a smartphone, first install the dedicated application CameraWindow on your • No sound is played for movies shot in [ ] (= 58), [ ] (= 65), or [ ] smartphone (= 136). 9 Accessories (= 67) mode because audio is not recorded in these modes. • To add a computer, first install the CameraWindow application on your computer. Also Appendix check your computer and Wi-Fi environment and settings ( 137, 140). 10 Memory Card = • Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as microwave Index The memory card is not recognized. ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band. • Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (= 22). • Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.

187 Cover Cannot connect to the access point. On-Screen Messages • Confirm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the camera Before Use (= 205). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to specify a If an error message is displayed, respond as follows. supported channel manually. Common Camera No memory card Operations Cannot send images. • The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory card Basic Guide • The destination device has insufficient storage space. Increase the storage space on facing the correct way (= 14). the destination device and resend the images. Memory card locked Advanced Guide • The write-protect tab of the memory card in the destination camera is set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position. • The write-protect tab of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch the write-protect tab to the unlocked position (= 13). 1 Camera Basics • RAW images cannot be sent. In [ ] mode, only the JPEG images are sent. • Images cannot be sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you Cannot record! Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode move or rename image files or folders on the computer that received images sent • Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a using Image Sync via an access point (= 151). Before moving or renaming these memory card facing the correct way (= 14). Other Shooting image files or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already been sent 3 Modes Memory card error (= 161) to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services. P Mode • If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a supported 4 Cannot resize images for sending. memory card (= 2) and have inserted it facing the correct way (= 14), contact Tv, Av, M, and • Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the resolution setting of their original size. a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. 5 C Mode • Movies cannot be resized. Insufficient space on card 6 Playback Mode Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted. • There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (= 30, 53, 69, 93) • Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to [ ] or [ ] or edit images (= 124 – 127). Either erase unneeded images (= 118) or insert a 7 Wi-Fi Functions to reduce sending time (= 148). memory card with enough free space (= 13). • Movies may take a long time to send. Touch AF unavailable 8 Setting Menu • Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as microwave • Touch AF is not available in the current shooting mode (= 194). ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band. Note 9 Accessories that images may take a long time to send even when [ ] is displayed. Touch AF canceled Appendix • Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the • The subject selected for Touch AF can no longer be detected (= 86). 10 access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices. = Charge the battery ( 12) Index • When sending images to a computer from a memory card with a large amount of images (approximately 1,000), the connection may be disrupted. Import any No Image. necessary images to a computer, and then reduce the number of images on the • The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed. memory card by erasing unnecessary images. Protected! (= 116) Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the camera or giving it to someone else. • Reset the Wi-Fi settings (= 155). 188 Cover Unidentified Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play Naming error! back MOV • The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the highest Before Use • Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed. supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders has been reached. Common Camera • It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a computer, Operations or images shot with another camera. On the [3] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset] (= 161), or format the memory card (= 160). Basic Guide Cannot magnify!/Cannot play back this content in Smart Shuffle/ Lens Error Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/Cannot assign to Advanced Guide category/Unselectable image./No identification information • This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is used • The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or already in dusty or sandy locations. Camera Basics edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that starred (*) • Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case, 1 functions are not available for movies. Edit ID Info* (= 112 – 113), Magnify* contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. Auto Mode / (= 113), Smart Shuffle* (= 115), Rotate (= 120), Favorites (= 121), Edit* 2 Hybrid Auto Mode A camera error was detected (error number) (= 124 – 127), Print List* (= 180), and Photobook Set-up* (= 182). Other Shooting • If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not have 3 Modes • Grouped images cannot be processed (= 79). been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image. Invalid selection range • Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case, 4 P Mode • When specifying a range for image selection (= 117, 120, 181), you attempted to write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support Help Tv, Av, M, and choose an initial image that was after the final image, or vice-versa. Desk. 5 C Mode Exceeded selection limit File Error 6 Playback Mode • More than 998 images were selected for Print List (= 180) or Photobook Set-up • Correct printing (= 176) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or (= 182). Choose 998 images or less. images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is Wi-Fi Functions connected to the printer. 7 • Print List (= 180) or Photobook Set-up (= 182) settings could not be saved correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again. Print error 8 Setting Menu • You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (= 116), Erase • Check the paper size setting (= 178). If this error message is displayed when the (= 118), Favorites (= 121), Print List (= 180), or Photobook Set-up (= 182). setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera again. 9 Accessories Communication error Ink absorber full 10 Appendix • An excessive amount of images (approx. 1,000) on the memory card prevented • Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink printing or image transfer to a computer. To transfer the images, use a commercially absorber replacement. Index available USB card reader. To print, insert the memory card directly into the printer card slot.

189 Cover Wi-Fi Receiving failed Insufficient space on card Connection failed Before Use • There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to receive • No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (= 140). Common Camera images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a memory card Operations • A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the with sufficient space. connection. Basic Guide Receiving failed • Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection. Memory card locked Advanced Guide Cannot determine access point • The write-protect tab of the memory card in the camera to receive the images is set to • The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try the locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position. Camera Basics reconnecting again. 1 Receiving failed No access points found Auto Mode / Naming error! 2 Hybrid Auto Mode • Check to make sure that the access point is turned on. • When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999) have Other Shooting • When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received. 3 Modes correct SSID. Insufficient space on server 4 P Mode Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings • Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create space. • Check the access point security settings (= 140). • Save the images sent via Image Sync (= 151) to your computer. Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode IP address conflict Check network settings Playback Mode • Reset the IP address so that it does not conflict with another. • Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current 6 network settings. Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed 7 Wi-Fi Functions • You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed. • Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, 8 Setting Menu and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band. Accessories • Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the 9 access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices. Appendix • Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors. 10 Sending failed Index Memory card error • If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.

190 Cover On-Screen Information AF frame (= 82), ISO speed (= 72) Shadow correction Spot AE point frame Grid lines (= 98) (= 75) Before Use (= 71) Shooting (Information Display) Flash mode Zoom bar (= 30) Common Camera Date stamp (= 87) Wind filter (= 33) Operations (= 40) Hybrid Auto mode Time zone (= 158) Basic Guide DR correction (= 32) Image stabilization (= 75) Metering method (= 91) Advanced Guide Camera shake (= 71) MF indicator warning ( 33) = Touch Shutter (= 80) 1 Camera Basics AE lock (= 71), (= 39) Exposure shift bar FE lock (= 89) Auto Mode / White balance (= 67) 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Shutter speed (= 76) Exposure level ( 94, 95) Other Shooting = Mercury lamp (= 95) 3 Modes Electronic level correction (= 48) Exposure P Mode (= 49) ND filter (= 75) compensation bar 4 Aperture value Eco mode (= 159) (= 70) Tv, Av, M, and (= 94, 95) 5 AEB shooting C Mode Exposure (= 74), Focus 6 Playback Mode compensation level bracketing (= 81) (= 70) Red-eye correction IS mode icon Digital zoom 7 Wi-Fi Functions (= 47) (= 35) magnification Shooting mode Battery level (= 36), Digital Battery Level 8 Setting Menu (= 193), Scene (= 191) tele-converter An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level. Accessories icon (= 34) Compression (image (= 82) Display Details 9 Flash exposure quality) (= 91) Remaining time Sufficient charge Appendix compensation / / Resolution (= 206) 10 Flash output level (= 47), RAW Histogram (= 106) Slightly depleted, but sufficient Index (= 88, 96) (= 90) Focusing range Nearly depleted—charge the battery pack soon Drive mode Recordable shots (= 55, 80), AF (Blinking red) (= 79) (= 205) lock (= 87) [Charge the battery] Depleted—charge the battery pack immediately My Colors (= 78) Movie resolution Blink detection Self-timer (= 38) (= 48, 68) (= 50)

191 Cover Playback (Detailed Information Display) Group playback Compression (image Still images: (= 111), Image quality) (= 91) Resolution (= 205) Before Use quality / Frame / Resolution Movies: Playback Common Camera rate (movies) (= 47), Digest time (= 206) Operations (= 48, 67) movies (= 107), File size RAW (= 90), Basic Guide MP4 (movies) Advanced Guide • Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on a TV (= 169). 1 Camera Basics Auto Mode / Summary of Movie Control Panel in “Viewing” (= 104) 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Exit Movies (= 30, 104) Shutter speed White balance 3 Modes Current image no. / (= 94, 95) correction (= 77), Touch to display the volume panel, and then touch [o][p] to adjust the volume. 4 P Mode Total no. of images Aperture value Mercury lamp At a volume of 0, [ ] is displayed. Tv, Av, M, and Histogram (= 106) (= 94, 95) correction (= 48) Play 5 My Colors C Mode Battery level Exposure Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the < >< > buttons or turn (= 78, 125) q r (= 191) compensation level the <7> dial. No sound is played.) 6 Playback Mode Wi-Fi signal strength (= 70), Exposure Focusing range shift level (= 67) (= 55, 80) Skip Backward* or Previous Clip (= 129) (To continue skipping backward, Wi-Fi Functions (= 148) keep holding down the button.) 7 Image Sync ISO speed (= 72), ND filter (= 75) Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the button.) Setting Menu (= 151) Playback speed Red-eye correction 8 (= 59) Image editing (= 47, 127) Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the button.) Metering method 9 Accessories (= 124 – 127) High ISO NR Skip Forward* or Next Clip (= 129) (To continue skipping forward, keep (= 71) (= 73) Favorites (= 121) holding down the button.) Appendix Flash exposure 10 Protection (= 116) DR correction Edit ( 128) compensation / * = (= 75) Index Folder number - File Flash output level Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie is selected (= 129)) number (= 161) Shadow correction (= 88, 96) (= 75) c Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible printer (= 176). Shooting date/time White balance (= 15) (= 76) * Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame. Shooting mode (= 193) • During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the previous or next clip) by pressing the buttons. 192 Cover Functions and Menu Tables Before Use

Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode Common Camera Operations Shooting Mode K E Basic Guide DBMG I S P t E Function Advanced Guide Exposure Compensation (= 70) *1 – OOO –– OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO ––– Flash (= 87) 1 Camera Basics *1 ––– OOOOOOO ––– OOO –– OOOO – OOOO –– Auto Mode / h *1 OOOO –– OOOO ––– OOO –– OOOO – OOOO –– 2 Hybrid Auto Mode 1 2 2 2 Z * – O – O * * ––––––– * ––––––––––––––– Other Shooting ! *1 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 3 Modes Flash Exposure Compensation (= 88) *1 – OOO ––––––––––––––––––––––––– P Mode Flash Output Level (= 96) *1 OOO –––––––––––––––––––––––––– 4 Aperture Value (= 94, 95) *1 OO ––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode Shutter Speed (= 94, 95) *1 O – O –––––––––––––––––––––––––– Program Shift (= 71) O – OOO ––––––––––––––––––––––––– 6 Playback Mode AE Lock (= 71)/FE Lock (= 89)*3 O – OOO ––––––––––––––––––––––––– AE Lock (Movie)/Exposure Shift (= 67)*4 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O – 7 Wi-Fi Functions AF Lock (when assigned to the < > button) (= 99) OOOOO –– O ––– OOOOOO – OOOOOOOOOOOO Setting Menu Focusing Range (= 55, 80, 87) 8 *1 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO Accessories e *1 OOOO –– O –––––– O – O – OOOOOOOOOOOO 9 8 ––––––––––––––– O –––––––––––––– 10 Appendix f/AF Lock *1 OOOO –– O ––– OOOOOO – OOOOO – OOOOOO Index *1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode. O Available or set automatically. – Not available. *2 Not available, but switches to [Z] in some cases. *3 FE lock not available in [!] flash mode. *4 In modes other than [E], AE lock and Exposure shift are only available when shooting movies.

193 Cover Shooting Mode K E Before Use DBMG I S P t E Function Common Camera 1 Operations Move AF Frame (= 83) * OOOO –– O ––– OOO –– O –– O ––––– OOOO – Face Select (= 85) OOOOOOOOOOO ––––– O – OO –– OOOOOOOO Basic Guide Touch AF (= 83) OOOOOOOO *2 *2 *2 ––––– O – OO ––––– OOOO – Touch Shutter (= 39) OOOOO *3 OO –––––– *4 – O *4 OO *4 – *3 *3 *3 OOO *3 *3 Advanced Guide Screen Display (= 24) *1 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 1 Camera Basics 1 * OOOOOOO –––––– OOOO – OO – OOOOOOOO Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode *1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode. O Available or set automatically. – Not available. *2 Only available when faces are detected. 3 Other Shooting *3 No tracking, but AF frames can be specified. Modes *4 Only available for shooting. Subject designation not available. 4 P Mode Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

194 Cover FUNC. Menu Before Use Shooting Mode K E Common Camera DBMG Operations I S P t E Function Basic Guide DR Correction (= 75) *1 OOOO –– OOOOOOOO – OOOOOOOOOOOO –– Advanced Guide *1 – OOOOO –––––––– O –––––––––––––– 1 Camera Basics * OOOO ––––––––––––––––––––––––– 1 Shadow Correct (= 75) Auto Mode / *1 OOOO –– OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO –– 2 Hybrid Auto Mode *1 OOOOOO ––––––––––––––––––––––– Other Shooting 3 Modes ISO Speed (= 72) *1 – OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 4 P Mode – *1 OOOO ––––––––––––––––––––––––– Tv, Av, M, and White Balance (= 76) 5 C Mode *1 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO Playback Mode 1 6 S * OOOO ––– OOO ––––––––––––––––– O – 1 h * OOOO ––– OOO ––––––––––––––––––– 7 Wi-Fi Functions *1 OOOO ––– OOO –––– O –––––––––––– O – White Balance Correction (= 77) *1 OOOO –––––– *2 *2 *2 – *2 –––––––––––––– 8 Setting Menu Drive Mode (= 79) *1 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 9 Accessories –––––– O ––––––––––––––––––––––– Appendix *1 OOOO –– O ––––––– OOO – OOOO – OOOO –– 10 3 1 * * OOOO –––––––––– OOO – OOOO – OOOO –– Index *1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode. O Available or set automatically. – Not available. *2 Advanced settings not available. *3 [ ] is set with [f], AF lock, or [t].

195 Cover Shooting Mode K E Before Use DBMG I S P t E Function Common Camera Operations Self-Timer (= 38) *1 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO Basic Guide ] [ $ *1 OOOOOOO ––– OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO Self-Timer Settings (= 39) Advanced Guide Delay*2 *1 OOOOOOO ––– OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO Shots*3 *1 OOOO – OO –––––– OOOOOOOOOOOOOO –– 1 Camera Basics My Colors (= 78) Auto Mode / *1 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 2 Hybrid Auto Mode 4 4 5 * * * *1 OOOO ––– OOO ––––––––––––––––– O – Other Shooting 3 Modes Bracketing (= 74, 81) *1 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 4 P Mode *1 – OOO ––––––––––––––––––––––––– Tv, Av, M, and *1 OOOO ––––––––––––––––––––––––– 5 C Mode Metering Method (= 71) Playback Mode *1 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 6 *1 OOOO ––––––––––––––––––––––––– 7 Wi-Fi Functions ND Filter (= 75) *1 OOOO ––––––––––––––––––––––– OO 8 Setting Menu *1 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO Accessories Still Image Aspect Ratio (= 46) 9 *1 OOOO – OOOOOOO –– OOO ––– *6 ––– OOO –– 10 Appendix *1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode. O Available or set automatically. – Not available. *2 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots. Index *3 One shot (cannot be modified) in modes without selection of the number of shots. *4 White balance is not available. *5 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue, and skin tone. *6 Only [ ] and [ ] are available.

196 Cover Shooting Mode K E Before Use DBMG I S P t E Function Common Camera Operations Image Type (= 90) *1 OOOO ––––––––––––––––––––––––– Basic Guide Resolution (= 47) *1 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO Advanced Guide *1 OOOO – OOOOO –––– OOO –––––––––– OO Camera Basics Compression (= 91) 1 *1 OOOO ––––––––––––––––––––––––– Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode *1 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO Other Shooting Movie Quality (= 48, 68) 3 Modes *1 OOOOOOOOOOOO – OOOOOOO – OOOOOOO – *1 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO – OOOOOOO – 4 P Mode *1 OOOOOOOOOOOO – OOOOOOO *2 OOOOOOO – Tv, Av, M, and ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O 5 C Mode *1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode. O Available or set automatically. – Not available. 6 Playback Mode *2 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (= 59). 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

197 Cover

4 Shooting Tab Menu Before Use

Shooting Mode K E Common Camera DBMG Operations I S P t E Function Basic Guide AF Frame (= 82) Face AiAF*2 *1 OOOOOOOOOO ––– O – O – OO –– OOOOOOOO Advanced Guide 1-point *1 OOOO –– O ––– OOO – OOO – OO – O – OOOOOO Camera Basics AF Frame Size*3 (= 83) 1 Normal *1 OOOO –– O ––––––– OO –– OO – O – OOOOOO Auto Mode / Small *1 OOOO –– O ––––––– OO –– O –– O – OOOOOO 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Touch Shutter (= 39) Other Shooting 3 Modes On *1 OOOOOOO –––––– O – OOOOO – OOOOOOOO Off *1 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 4 P Mode Digital Zoom (= 36) 1 Tv, Av, M, and Standard * OOOOOOOOOO –––– OOO –––––––––– O – 5 C Mode Off *1 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 1.5/2.0x *1 OOOO ––––––––––––––––––––––––– 6 Playback Mode AF-Point Zoom (= 49) Wi-Fi Functions On *1 OOOO – OOOOO –––– OO –– O ––––– OOO –– 7 1 Off * OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 8 Setting Menu *1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode. O Available or set automatically. – Not available. *2 Operation when no faces are detected varies by shooting mode. 9 Accessories *3 Available when the AF frame is set to [1-point]. 10 Appendix

Index

198 Cover Shooting Mode K E Before Use DBMG I S P t E Function Common Camera Operations Servo AF (= 84) On *1 OOOO –– O ––––––– OO –– O ––––– OOO –– Basic Guide Off*2 *1 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO Continuous AF (= 84) Advanced Guide On *1 OOOOOOOOOO ––– OOO – OOOOOOOOOOOO Off *1 OOOO –– O ––– OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO –– 1 Camera Basics AF-assist Beam (= 51) Auto Mode / On *1 OOOOOOOOOO ––– O – O – OOOOOOOOOOOO 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Off *1 OOOOOOO – OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO Other Shooting MF-Point Zoom (= 81) 3 Modes 1 Off * OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 4 P Mode 2x/4x *1 OOOO –– O ––– OOO – OO –– O ––––– OOO –– Tv, Av, M, and Safety MF (= 80) 5 C Mode On *1 OOOO –– O ––– OOOOOO – OOOOO – OOOOOO Off *1 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 6 Playback Mode MF Peaking Settings (= 81) Peaking On/Off *1 OOOO –– O ––– OOOOOO – OOOOO – OOOOOO 7 Wi-Fi Functions Level High/Low *1 OOOO –– O ––– OOOOOO – OOOOO – OOOOOO Setting Menu Color Red/Blue/Yellow *1 OOOO –– O ––– OOOOOO – OOOOO – OOOOOO 8 *1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode. O Available or set automatically. – Not available. 9 Accessories *2 [On] when subject movement is detected in [ ] mode. 10 Appendix

Index

199 Cover Shooting Mode K E Before Use DBMG I S P t E Function Common Camera Operations Flash Settings (= 47, 51, 88, 89, 96) Auto *1 – OOOOOOOOO ––– OOO –– OOOO – OOOO –– Flash Mode Basic Guide Manual *1 OOO –––––––––––––––––––––––––– On *1 OOOOOOOOOO ––– O – O ––––––––––––– Advanced Guide Red-Eye Corr. Off *1 OOOOOOOOOO ––– OOO –– OOOO – OOOO –– On *1 OOOOOOOOOO ––– O – O –– OOOO – OOOO –– 1 Camera Basics Red-Eye Lamp 1 Off * OOOOOOOOOO ––– OOO –– OOOO – OOOO –– Auto Mode / Flash Exp. Comp *1 – OOO ––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Flash Output *1 OOO –––––––––––––––––––––––––– Other Shooting Shutter Sync. 1st-curtain/2nd-curtain *1 OOOO ––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3 Modes On *1 – OOOOOOOOO ––– OOO –– OOOO – OOOO –– Safety FE 4 P Mode Off *1 OOOO ––––––––––––––––––––––––– Tv, Av, M, and ISO Auto Settings (= 73) 5 C Mode Max ISO Speed *1 – OOO ––––––––––––––––––––––––– Rate of Change *1 – O – O ––––––––––––––––––––––––– 6 Playback Mode High ISO NR (= 73) Standard/High/Low *1 OOOO ––––––––––––––––––––––––– 7 Wi-Fi Functions Hg Lamp Corr. (= 48) Setting Menu On/Off –––––– O ––––––––––––––––––––––– 8 Spot AE Point (= 71) Accessories Center/AF Point *1 OOOO ––––––––––––––––––––––––– 9 *1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode. O Available or set automatically. – Not available. 10 Appendix

Index

200 Cover Shooting Mode K E Before Use DBMG I S P t E Function Common Camera Operations Safety Shift (= 94) On *1 – OO –––––––––––––––––––––––––– Basic Guide Off *1 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO Wind Filter (= 33) Advanced Guide Auto/Off *1 OOOOOOOOOOOO – OOOOOOO – OOOOOOO – Review image after shooting (= 52) 1 Camera Basics 1 2 Display Time Off/Quick/2 sec./4 sec./8 sec./Hold * OOOOOOOOOOOO * OOOOOOOOOOOOOO –– Auto Mode / Display Info Off/Detailed *1 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO –– 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Blink Detection (= 50) Other Shooting On *1 OOOOOOOOOO ––––– O –– O –––––– OO –– 3 Modes 1 Off * OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 4 P Mode Custom Display (= 98) Shooting Info/Grid Lines/Electronic Level/Histogram *1 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode Night Display (= 92) On/Off *1 OOOO –––––– OOO –––––––––––––––– 6 Playback Mode FUNC. Menu Layout (= 100) OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO IS Settings (= 91) 7 Wi-Fi Functions Off *1 OOOOOOOOOOOOO – OOOOOOOOOOOOOOO Setting Menu IS Mode Continuous *1 OOOOOOOOOO ––– OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 8 1 –– –––– –– Shoot Only * OOOO OOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOO Accessories 1 *1 OOOOOOOOOO ––– OOOOOOO – OOOOOOO – 9 Dynamic IS 2 *1 OOOO – OOOOOOOO – OOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 10 Appendix *1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode. O Available or set automatically. – Not available. *2 Only [2 sec.], [4 sec.], and [8 sec.] are available. Index

201 Cover Shooting Mode K E Before Use DBMG I S P t E Function Common Camera Operations Date Stamp (= 40) Off *1 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO Basic Guide Date/Date & Time *1 OOOOOOOOOO –––– OOO –––––––––––– Digest Type (= 32) Advanced Guide Include Stills/No Stills ––––– O –––––––––––––––––––––––– Camera Basics Save Stills (= 66) 1 On/Off ––––––––––––– O –––––––––––––––– Auto Mode / Star Emphasis (= 64) 2 Hybrid Auto Mode On/Off ––––––––––– O –––––––––––––––––– Other Shooting 3 Modes Face ID Settings (= 41) *1 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO Set Control Ring Func. (= 97) *1 OOOO ––––––––––––––––––––––––– 4 P Mode Set button (= 99) *1 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 1 Tv, Av, M, and Set button (= 99) * OOOOOOOOOOOO – OOOOOOOOOOOOOO –– 5 C Mode Save Settings (= 101) OOOOO ––––––––––––––––––––––––– 6 Playback Mode *1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode. O Available or set automatically. – Not available. - Names of people in shots taken using Face ID (= 41) may not be displayed in some Wi-Fi Functions modes or with some settings, but they will be recorded in the still images. 7 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

202 Cover 3 Set Up Tab Menu 1 Playback Tab Menu Before Use Item Ref. Page Item Ref. Page Item Ref. Page Item Ref. Page Common Camera Mute = 157 Create Folder = 162 Image Search = 109 Cropping = 125 Operations Volume = 157 Units = 162 List/Play Digest Movies = 108 Resize = 124 Basic Guide Sound Options = 157 Electronic Level = 162 Smart Shuffle = 115 My Colors = 125 Advanced Guide Hints & Tips = 158 Video System = 172 Slideshow = 114 Face ID Info = 108 Date/Time = 15 Ctrl via HDMI = 170 Erase = 118 Transition Effect = 105 1 Camera Basics Time Zone = 158 Touch Operation = 163 Protect = 116 Index Effect = 108 Auto Mode / Lens Retract = 159 Touch Response = 163 Rotate = 120 Scroll Display = 105 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Eco Mode = 159 Wi-Fi Settings = 130 Favorites = 121 Group Images = 111 Other Shooting Power Saving = 22, 159 Copyright Info = 163 3 Modes Photobook Set-up = 182 Auto Rotate = 121 LCD Brightness = 160 Certification Logo Display = 164 P Mode i-Contrast = 126 Resume = 105 4 Start-up Image = 160 Language = 16 Red-Eye Correction = 127 Set Touch Actions = 122 Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode Format = 160, 161 Reset All = 165 File Numbering = 161 6 Playback Mode 2 Print Tab Menu 7 Wi-Fi Functions My Menu Tab Menu Item Ref. Page Item Ref. Page Print – Select All Images = 181 8 Setting Menu Item Ref. Page Select Images & Qty. = 180 Clear All Selections = 182 Accessories My Menu settings = 102 Select Range = 181 Print Settings = 180 9 10 Appendix

Index

203 Cover Handling Precautions Specifications Before Use The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or Camera Effective • Approx. 12.1 million pixels Common Camera subjecting it to strong impact. Pixels (Max.) Operations 5x zoom: 5.2 (W) – 26.0 (T) mm • Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that Lens Focal Length Basic Guide generate strong electromagnetic fields, which may cause malfunction or (35mm film equivalent: 24 (W) – 120 (T) mm) 3.0-type color TFT LCD erase image data. LCD Monitor Advanced Guide Effective Pixels: Approx. 922,000 dots • If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with a dry Design rule for Camera File system, DPOF (version 1.1) Camera Basics soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply force. File Format 1 compliant • Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera or Auto Mode / Still Images: 2.3 (JPEG), RAW (CR2 (Canon Original)) 2 Hybrid Auto Mode screen. Data Type Movies: MP4 (Video: H.264; Audio: MPEG2 AAC-LC (stereo)) Other Shooting • Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difficult, Hi-speed USB 3 Modes contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. HDMI output Interface P Mode • To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden Analog audio output (stereo) 4 temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to warm Analog video output (NTSC/PAL) Tv, Av, M, and Battery Pack NB-6LH 5 C Mode environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic bag and Power Source let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it from the bag. AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC40 6 Playback Mode Dimensions (Based • If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately. 100.2 x 59.0 x 29.0 mm (3.94 x 2.32 x 1.14 in.) Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove on CIPA Guidelines) 7 Wi-Fi Functions Approx. 217 g (approx. 7.65 oz.; including the battery pack the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has Weight (Based on and memory card) Setting Menu evaporated before resuming use. CIPA Guidelines) 8 Approx. 193 g (approx. 6.81 oz.; camera body only) • Before long-term battery storage, use up the battery pack’s remaining 9 Accessories charge, remove it from the camera, and store it in a plastic bag or similar container. Storing a partially charged battery pack over extended periods 10 Appendix (about a year) may shorten its life or affect performance. Index

204 Cover

Wi-Fi Functions Number of 4:3 Shots per Memory Card Before Use IEEE802.11b/g/n* Number of Shots per Memory Card Common Camera Standards Compression * 2.4 GHz band only Recording Pixels (Approx. shots) Operations Ratio Transmission OFDM modulation (IEEE 802.11g/n) 8 GB 32 GB Basic Guide DSSS modulation (IEEE 802.11b) Methods 1379 5568 (Large) Infrastructure mode*1, Ad hoc mode*2 Advanced Guide Communication *1 Supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup 12M/4000x3000 2192 8850 Modes *2 Wi-Fi Certified IBSS 2431 9814 Camera Basics (Medium 1) 1 1 – 11 (PC2036, PC2061) or 1 – 13 (PC2003) Supported Channels 6M/2816x2112 Model numbers indicated in parentheses (= 211) 3721 15020 Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode WEP, WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP), 7442 30040 Security (Medium 2) Other Shooting WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP) 2M/1600x1200 12927 52176 3 Modes

27291 110150 P Mode (Small) 4 Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time 0.3M/640x480 40937 165225 Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode Number of Shots Approx. 230 RAW Images – 446 1804 Eco Mode On Approx. 300 4000x3000 6 Playback Mode 1 Movie Recording Time* Approx. 30 minutes • The values in the table are measured according to Canon standards and may change Wi-Fi Functions Continuous depending on the subject, memory card and camera settings. 7 Approx. 1 hour Shooting*2 • The values in the table are based on 4:3 aspect ratio. If the aspect ratio is changed 8 Setting Menu Playback Time Approx. 4 hours (= 46), more images can be shot because the data size per image will be smaller *1 Time under default camera settings, when normal operations are performed, such as than with 4:3 images. However, since [ ] 16:9 images have a setting of 1920 x 1080 9 Accessories shooting, pausing, turning the camera on and off, and zooming. pixels, their data size will be larger than 4:3 images. *2 Time available when shooting the maximum movie length (until recording stops Appendix automatically) repeatedly. 10 • The number of shots that can be taken is based on measurement guidelines of the Index Camera & Imaging Products Association (CIPA). • Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording time may be less than mentioned above. • Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.

205 Cover

Recording Time per Memory Card Shooting Range Before Use Recording Time per Memory Card Maximum Wide Angle Maximum Telephoto Common Camera Image Quality Shooting Mode Focusing Range 8 GB 32 GB (j) (i) Operations 3 cm – infinity 30 cm – infinity 30 min. 03 sec. 2 hr. 01 min. 27 sec. – Basic Guide (1.2 in. – infinity) (11.8 in. – infinity) 43 min. 29 sec. 2 hr. 55 min. 43 sec. 5 cm – infinity 30 cm – infinity Advanced Guide 2 hr. 03 min. 55 sec. 8 hr. 20 min. 32 sec. (2.0 in. – infinity) (11.8 in. – infinity) 3 – 50 cm 30 – 50 cm Camera Basics e* 1 5 hr. 14 min. 34 sec. 21 hr. 10 min. 33 sec. (1.2 in. – 1.6 ft.) (11.8 in. – 1.6 ft.) Auto Mode / 3 cm – infinity 30 cm – infinity • The values in the table are measured according to Canon standards and may change Other modes f* 2 Hybrid Auto Mode (1.2 in. – infinity) (11.8 in. – infinity) depending on the subject, memory card and camera settings. Other Shooting 3 – 50 cm • Recording will automatically stop when the clip file size reaches 4 GB, or when the – 3 Modes recording time reaches approximately 29 minutes and 59 seconds when shooting in (1.2 in. – 1.6 ft.) P Mode [ ], [ ] or [ ], or approximately 1 hour when shooting in [ ]. 1.5 – 20 m 1.5 – 20 m 4 8 • Recording may stop even if the maximum clip length has not been reached on some (4.9 – 66 ft.) (4.9 – 66 ft.) Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode memory cards. SD Speed Class 6 or higher memory cards are recommended. * Not available in some shooting modes. 6 Playback Mode Flash Range Continuous Shooting Speed 7 Wi-Fi Functions Maximum wide angle (j) 50 cm – 7.0 m (1.6 – 23 ft.) Continuous Shooting Mode Speed Maximum telephoto (i) 50 cm – 2.3 m (1.6 – 7.5 ft.) Approx. 12.1 shots/sec. Setting Menu W 8 Approx. 9.4 shots/sec.* Approx. 5.5 shots/sec. 9 Accessories Approx. 5.6 shots/sec. 10 Appendix * From the sixth shot. Index • Based on Canon testing standards, using a 8 GB UHS-I memory card. Note that the number of shots will vary depending on subjects, the brand of memory card, and other factors.

206 Cover

Shutter Speed Battery Charger CB-2LY/CB-2LYE Before Use [ ] mode, automatically set range 1 – 1/2500 sec. Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz), 0.085 A (100 V) – 0.05 A (240 V) Common Camera Rated Output: 4.2 V DC, 0.7 A Operations 250, 200, 160, 125, 100, 80, 60, 50, 40, 30, 25, Charging Time: Approx. 2 hr. (when using NB-6LH) 20, 15, 13, 10, 8, 6, 5, 4, 3.2, 2.5, 2, 1.6, 1.3, 1, Charge Indicator: Charging: orange / Fully charged: green Basic Guide 0.8, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/8, 1/10, Available values in [M] or [D] mode (two-indicator system) 1/13, 1/15, 1/20, 1/25, 1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60, (sec.)* Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F) Advanced Guide 1/80, 1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200, 1/250, 1/320, 1/400, 1/500, 1/640, 1/800, 1/1000, 1/1250, All data is based on tests by Canon. Camera Basics 1/1600, 1/2000, 1/2500 • 1 • Camera specifications or appearance are subject to change without Auto Mode / * In [M] mode, shutter speeds of 20 seconds or slower are not available. notice. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Aperture 3 Modes f/number f/1.8 – f/8.0 (W), f/5.7 – f/8.0 (T) 4 P Mode f/1.8, f/2.0, f/2.2, f/2.5, f/2.8, f/3.2, f/3.5, f/4.0, Available values in [B] mode* Tv, Av, M, and f/4.5, f/5.0, f/5.6, f/5.7, f/6.3, f/7.1, f/8.0 5 C Mode * Depending on the zoom position, some aperture values may not be available. 6 Playback Mode

Battery Pack NB-6LH 7 Wi-Fi Functions Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery Setting Menu Nominal Voltage: 3.7 V DC 8 Nominal Capacity: 1060 mAh Accessories Charging Cycles: Approx. 300 times 9 Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F) Dimensions: 34.4 x 41.8 x 6.9 mm (1.35 x 1.65 x 0.27 in.) 10 Appendix Weight: Approx. 22 g (approx. 0.78 oz.) Index

207 Cover Index Display language...... 16 Flash DPOF...... 180 Deactivating flash...... 88 Before Use Drive mode...... 79 Flash exposure compensation...... 88 Numbers Camera On...... 87 Common Camera Dynamic Range Correction...... 75 Operations 1-point (AF frame mode)...... 82 Reset all...... 165 Slow synchro...... 88 Camera access point mode...... 145 Focus bracketing...... 81 E Basic Guide A Camera shake...... 91 Focus check...... 113 Eco mode...... 159 AC adapter kit...... 168, 172 CameraWindow (computer)...... 137 Focusing Advanced Guide Editing Accessories...... 168 CameraWindow (smartphone)...... 136 AF frames...... 82 Cropping...... 125 CANON iMAGE AF lock...... 87 Camera Basics AEB shooting...... 74 i-Contrast...... 126 1 GATEWAY...... 131, 133, 134 AF-point zoom...... 49 AE lock...... 71 My Colors...... 125 Face select...... 85 Auto Mode / Clock...... 28 2 Hybrid Auto Mode AF frames...... 82 Red-eye correction...... 127 MF peaking...... 81 Color (white balance)...... 76 Resizing images...... 124 Other Shooting AF lock...... 87 Servo AF...... 84 3 Modes Compression ratio (image quality)...... 91 Editing or erasing connection Touch AF...... 86 Aspect ratio...... 46 information...... 153 Connecting via an access point...... 140 Focusing range AUTO mode (shooting mode)... 17, 23, 30 P Mode Electronic level...... 49 4 Connecting without an access point... 145 Macro...... 80 Av (shooting mode)...... 94 Erasing...... 118 Manual focus...... 80 Tv, Av, M, and Continuous shooting...... 79 5 C Mode Error messages...... 188 Quick...... 55 B Control ring...... 96 Underwater Macro...... 55 Exposure 6 Playback Mode Background defocus Creative filters (shooting mode)...... 56 Focus lock...... 82 AE lock...... 71 (shooting mode)...... 60 Cropping...... 125, 177 Compensation...... 70 FUNC. menu 7 Wi-Fi Functions Batteries → Date/time (Date/time battery) Custom white balance...... 76 FE lock...... 89 Basic operations...... 24 Battery charger...... 2, 168 Table...... 195 8 Setting Menu Battery pack D F FUNC. menu layout...... 100 Accessories Charging...... 12 Date/time Face AiAF (AF frame mode)...... 83 9 G Eco mode...... 159 Adding date stamps...... 40 Face ID...... 41 Level...... 191 Changing...... 16 GPS information display...... 106, 107 Appendix Face select...... 85 10 Power saving...... 22 Date/time battery...... 16 Black and white images...... 78 Settings...... 15 Face self-timer (shooting mode)...... 63 H Index World clock...... 158 Favorites...... 121 Blink detection...... 50 Handheld nightscene DC coupler...... 172 FE lock...... 89 (shooting mode)...... 54 C Defaults → Reset all File numbering...... 161 HDMI cable...... 168 C (shooting mode)...... 97 Digital tele-converter...... 82 Fireworks (shooting mode)...... 55 High dynamic range (shooting mode).. 56 Digital zoom...... 36 Fish-eye effect (shooting mode)...... 58 Household power...... 172 208 Cover Hybrid Auto (shooting mode)...... 32 Movies R Shooting Editing...... 128 RAW...... 90 Shooting date/time → Date/time Before Use I Image quality Shooting information...... 98, 191 Red-eye correction...... 47, 127 Common Camera i-Contrast...... 74, 126 (resolution/frame rate)...... 48, 67 Slideshow...... 114 Recording time...... 206 Reset all...... 165 Operations Image quality → Compression ratio Smart Shuffle...... 115 Multi-area White Balance...... 48 Resizing images...... 124 (image quality) Smart Shutter (shooting mode)...... 61 Basic Guide My Colors...... 78, 125 Resolution (image size)...... 47 Image Sync...... 151 Smile (shooting mode)...... 61 Ring function selector button...... 96 Advanced Guide Images Snow (shooting mode)...... 54 N Rotating...... 120 Display period...... 52 Soft focus (shooting mode)...... 60 ND filter...... 75 1 Camera Basics Erasing...... 118 Software Playback → Viewing Nostalgic (shooting mode)...... 57 S Installation...... 137 Auto Mode / Protecting...... 116 Saving images to a computer...... 150 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Saving images to a computer...... 174 Indicator...... 28 P Screen Sounds...... 157 Other Shooting ISO speed...... 72 P (shooting mode)...... 70 Display language...... 16 3 Modes Star (shooting mode)...... 64 Icons...... 191, 192 Package contents...... 2 Star nightscape (shooting mode)... 64 P Mode Menu → FUNC. menu, Menu 4 L Photobook set-up...... 182 Star time-lapse movie SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards Tv, Av, M, and Lamp...... 51 PictBridge...... 169, 176 (shooting mode)...... 65 → Memory cards 5 C Mode Playback → Viewing Star trails (shooting mode)...... 64 M Searching...... 109 Stereo AV cable...... 171 Playback Mode Portrait (shooting mode)...... 54, 55 6 M (shooting mode)...... 95 Self-timer...... 38 Strap...... 2, 12 Poster effect (shooting mode)...... 56 2-second self-timer...... 38 Wi-Fi Functions Macro (focusing range)...... 80 Super slow motion movie 7 Power...... 168 Customizing the self-timer...... 39 Magnified display...... 113 (movie mode)...... 67 → AC adapter kit Face self-timer (shooting mode).... 63 8 Setting Menu Manual focus (focusing range)...... 80 → Battery charger Wink self-timer (shooting mode).... 62 Super vivid (shooting mode)...... 56 Memory cards...... 2 → Battery pack Sending images...... 148 9 Accessories Recording time...... 206 Power saving...... 22 Sending images to a computer...... 133 T Terminal...... 170, 171, 172, 176 Menu Printing...... 176 Sending images to another camera... 132 10 Appendix Touch Actions...... 122 Basic operations...... 25 Program AE...... 70 Sending images to a printer...... 133 Table...... 193 Touch AF...... 86 Index Protecting...... 116 Sending images to a smartphone...... 132 Mercury lamp correction...... 48 Touch Shutter...... 39 Sending images to Web services...... 132 Metering method...... 71 Toy camera effect (shooting mode)...... 59 Q Sepia tone images...... 78 Miniature effect (shooting mode)...... 58 Quick (focusing range)...... 55 Traveling with the camera...... 158 Servo AF...... 84 Monochrome (shooting mode)...... 61 Troubleshooting...... 185 Shadow Correct...... 75 TV display...... 169 209 Cover Tv (shooting mode)...... 94 Before Use U Common Camera Underwater Macro (focusing range)..... 55 Operations Underwater (shooting mode)...... 54 Basic Guide V Advanced Guide Viewing...... 19 Image search...... 109 Camera Basics Index display...... 108 1 Magnified display...... 113 Auto Mode / Single-image display...... 19 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Slideshow...... 114 Other Shooting Smart Shuffle...... 115 3 Modes TV display...... 169 4 P Mode W Tv, Av, M, and White balance (color)...... 76 5 C Mode Wi-Fi Playback Mode Connecting and sending 6 images...... 132 Wi-Fi Functions Wi-Fi functions...... 130 7 Wi-Fi menu...... 139 8 Setting Menu Wink self-timer (shooting mode)...... 62 World clock...... 158 9 Accessories Wrist strap → Strap 10 Appendix Z Index Zoom...... 18, 30, 36

210 Cover Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use. • Before Use The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be • The camera’s model number is PC2036/PC2061/ erased due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio Common Camera Operations PC2003. To identify your model, check the label on waves or static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make the bottom of the camera for a number beginning notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that Canon Basic Guide with PC. The built-in WLAN module model is written accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss of below. earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content. Advanced Guide • When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and reset 1 Camera Basics Country/Region of Purchase WLAN Module Model the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary. Auto Mode / U.S.A., Canada, Taiwan WM812 2 Hybrid Auto Mode • Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or Other WM218 theft of the product. Other Shooting 3 Modes • Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from P Mode unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this product 4 due to loss or theft of the product. Tv, Av, M, and • Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide. 5 C Mode Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the Playback Mode guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for 6 damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other than 7 Wi-Fi Functions • Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties: as described in this guide. - Altering or modifying the product • Do not use the wireless LAN function of this product near medical 8 Setting Menu - Removing the certification labels from the product equipment or other electronic equipment. Accessories • According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations, export Use of the wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other 9 electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices. permission (or service transaction permission) from the Japanese Appendix government is necessary to export strategic resources or services 10 (including this product) outside Japan. Index • Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls under U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported to or brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.

211 Cover Radio Wave Interference Precautions Security Precautions Before Use • This product may receive interference from other devices that emit radio Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required. Common Camera waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far away as Operations possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the same time Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi. as this product. • Only use networks you are authorized to use. Basic Guide This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays the Advanced Guide results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use (unknown networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to connect to or Camera Basics using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized access. Be sure 1 to use only networks you are authorized to use, and do not attempt to Auto Mode / connect to other unknown networks. 2 Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may Modes occur. 4 P Mode Transmission monitoring • Tv, Av, M, and Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions and 5 C Mode attempt to acquire the data you are sending. Playback Mode • Unauthorized network access 6 Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to 7 Wi-Fi Functions the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information. Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access 8 Setting Menu such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where 9 Accessories someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard to cover their tracks when infiltrating other systems). 10 Appendix

To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly Index secure your Wi-Fi network. Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security settings.

212 Cover The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers FCC/IC Notice via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy Model: PC2036 (including WLAN Module Model WM812, FCC ID: AZD812) Before Use

to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices Common Camera

directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS over IP Operations

enables PictBridge connections in network environments, Basic Guide and the camera is also compatible with this standard. Advanced Guide

Camera Basics 1 Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting 3 Modes Battery Charger CB-2LY 4 P Mode

Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode

6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions

Setting Menu 8 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

213 Cover FCC Notice (, Model PC2036 systems) Before Use

Common Camera Operations Basic Guide

Advanced Guide

Camera Basics Trademarks and Licensing 1 • Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Other Shooting • Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the 3 Modes

U.S. and other countries. 4 P Mode • App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc. Tv, Av, M, and • The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC. 5 C Mode • • HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are Playback Mode • trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. 6 • • Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Alliance®, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ 7 Wi-Fi Functions • are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Setting Menu • All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 8

• This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft. 9 Accessories • This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard Appendix and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding 10 MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the Index AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.

214 Cover

Disclaimer Before Use • Reprinting, transmitting, or storing in a retrieval system any part of this guide without the permission of Canon is prohibited. Common Camera Operations • Canon reserves the right to change the contents of this guide at any time without prior notice. Basic Guide • Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the actual equipment. Advanced Guide • The above items notwithstanding, Canon accepts no liability for damages due to mistaken operation of the products. 1 Camera Basics Auto Mode / 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting 3 Modes 4 P Mode Tv, Av, M, and 5 C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi-Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix

Index

215